Home Blog Page 3

Cooper says taxpayers won’t fund new Titans stadium | Titans

Nashville Mayor John Cooper says he and the Tennessee Titans are apparently close to reaching a pact that would ease any financial liability for the team’s closed new stadium to taxpayers, according to an editorial he published in the tennessian Thursday.

Cooper said his goal was to relieve taxpayers of any potential cost of a new Titans stadium and to hold the team accountable for providing most of the necessary funding; despite the $500 million bond, Governor Bill Lee asked the state legislature to earmark the stadium project.

According to Cooper, he seeks to protect Metro’s general fund, which pays for Nissan Stadium’s upkeep and upkeep through 2028 under the terms of the Titans’ current lease with the city, from being ravaged by the lawsuit by the team of a new multi-billion project. -dollar stage.

Apparently, Cooper says, the Titans (through private funding) and visitor spending (via the city’s proposed 1% hotel and motel tax increase) should be solely responsible for footing the bill. a new stadium.

Under Cooper’s vision, the Titans would also take financial responsibility for any stadium maintenance, and money from property and sales tax increases would not be used to fund construction or maintenance costs. of the stadium.

A potential new Titans stadium could cost up to $2 billion with $1.3 billion coming from the state. The Adams family, owners of the Titans, are also said to be willing to invest as much as $700 million their own money to fund the stadium.

Follow Michael Gallagher on Twitter @MGsports_

Raymond James sees a ‘key pipeline success factor’ for this MedTech stock

0
  • Raymond James reiterated the outperformance rating on LumiraDx Limited LMDX shares after Q1 revenue beat but margins fell short of expectations which ultimately has very little impact on the company’s long-term views.
  • They lowered the price target from $9 to $7.
  • Earnings were 7% above Raymond James’ opinion and 12% above consensus.
  • The pace was driven by Fast Lab instead of platform revenue, which was lower than analysts said, but mostly on a lack of instrument revenue, as most went into the field for free (but associated with hardware test strip orders).
  • Gross margins of 39.6% were reduced by 11 points due to placements of fully expensed instruments with no corresponding income.
  • Analysts expect the margin dynamics to resolve over time as core margins are in line with expectations.
  • The analyst believes net instrument installations and pipeline progress will have more impact.
  • More details are expected to arrive on the pipeline at the recently announced June Investor Day. The combination of HbA1c (summer launch in Europe), CRP (launched in Europe), INR (launched in Europe) and combined COVID-19/flu tests (upcoming CE marking submission) will already allow the LumiraDx platform to replace three separate instruments in the primary care setting.
  • Hitting deadlines and gaining momentum with non-COVID-19 testing will be key in 2H, but 1Q was, for the most part, “so far so good” on that front.
  • Price action: LMDX shares were up 1.05% at $3.84 during Thursday’s last check trading session.

DOL should raise the salary base threshold | Locke Lord LLP

0

The United States Department of Labor (“DOL”) is expected to propose a new wage threshold for various overtime exemptions under the Fair Labor Standards Act (“FLSA”). The new proposal is expected to be released in the near future and could be released as early as this month. Many expect the DOL to raise its current minimum wage threshold to $684/week, which could impact millions of employees in the United States.

Under the FLSA, employees must receive overtime pay of at least one and a half times their “regular rate” remuneration for work exceeding forty hours per working week. However, section 13(a)(1) of the RSA provides an exemption from overtime pay for persons employed in good faith. executive, administrativeand professional employees and who receive remuneration on a “salary baseof no less than $684/week. These exemptions are commonly referred to as “white collar” or “PAE” exemptions.

The base salary threshold has been raised several times since Congress enacted the FLSA in 1938. It should be noted that in 2016, the Obama administration attempted to raise the base salary threshold from $455/ week at $921/week. Ultimately, Judge Amos Mazzant of the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas barred the new threshold from taking effect after determining that the more than 100% salary increase violated the law. intent of Congress by supplanting the job function test and creating “a de facto wage-only test. At the time, the DOL estimated that the $921/week threshold would render more than 4.2 million workers ineligible for a white-collar exemption and eligible for overtime pay.Before the Fifth Circuit considered Judge Mazzant’s ruling, the Trump administration overturned the rule and raised the wage threshold to the current standard of $684/week .

The amount of a pay rise the DOL will propose and whether it will seek to index the threshold to a cost-of-living measure remains unknown at this time. Many unions and other worker advocates believe the DOL should match or exceed the $921 wage level of the rule proposed in 2016, with several groups demanding the wage level be set at $1,000 a week. If such an increase is proposed, it will impact millions of workers and will almost certainly meet resistance in federal courts from private employers and business groups. Many experts expect the DOL to set the salary threshold around $800, the midpoint between the current level and the proposed level for 2016.

Regardless of the ultimate wage level increase, employers relying on white-collar exemptions should be made aware of the potential changes. Although the DOL will almost certainly give employers several months of lead time before the new threshold is implemented, understanding the potential impact of a dramatic increase now will help employers adapt in the future. Employers should carefully consider all compensation practices, overtime exemptions, and potential FLSA liability in light of these potential changes.

MINERVA FOODS POSTS CONSOLIDATED GROSS REVENUE AND RECORD EBITDA IN FIRST QUARTER 2022

0

Gross revenue totaled R$7.6 billion over the period, up 25% compared to 1Q21. EBITDA amounted to 646 million reaisa historic record for the Company in the first quarter.

SAO PAULO, May 112022 /PRNewswire/ — Minerva Foods (Minerva SA – B3: BEEF3 | OTC – Nasdaq International: MRVSY), the South American leader in the export of fresh beef and beef by-products, which also operates in the food segment processed, announces to the market the financial results for the first quarter of 2022 (1Q22).

The Company’s consolidated gross revenues totaled R$7.6 billion in 1Q22, up 25% compared to 1Q21. In the 12 months ended March 2022 (LTM1Q22), consolidated gross sales reached R$30.1 billiona 35% increase over LTM1Q21.

In 1Q22, exports accounted for 70% of Minerva Foods gross revenues, cementing the Company’s position as the leading exporter of beef in South Americawith a market share of around 20% on the mainland.

Total EBITDA 646 million reais in 1Q22, up 33% year-on-year and a record level in the first quarter, with an EBITDA margin of 8.9%. At LTM1Q22, EBITDA was R$2.6 billiona growth of 15% compared to the same period of 2021, with an EBITDA margin of 9.1%.

In 1Q22, the Company recorded a net profit of 114.6 million reais. In the 12 months ended March, net income was approximately 454 million reais.

In 1Q22, net debt as measured by net debt to EBITDA LTM ​​ratio remained stable at 2.5x, confirming the company’s healthy capital structure and commitment to capital discipline.

Note also the payment of additional dividends in the amount of 200 million reaisor R$0.34/share. For fiscal 2021, Minerva Foods distributed a total of R$400.0 million in dividends, or R$0.69/share, corresponding to a dividend yield of 6.5% and a payout rate of approximately 70%.

About Minerva Foods
Minerva Foods is the South American leader in beef exports, which also operates in the processed foods segment, selling its products in more than 100 countries. In addition to BrazilMinerva Foods is present in Paraguay, Argentina, Uruguay, Colombia and Chile. The company supplies beef and its beef by-products to five continents and currently operates 25 slaughter and deboning plants, 16 international offices, 14 distribution centers and 3 processing plants.

Quote

Show original content:https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/minerva-foods-posts-record-consolidated-gross-revenue-and-ebitda-in-the-first-quarter-of-2022-301545579.html

SOURCE Minerva Foods

Drinking leads to aggravated assault | News

A Loudon man was arrested on May 2 and charged with aggravated assault after his drinking led to a heated argument.

Loudon County Sheriff’s Office Deputy Jonathan Sartin responded to an altercation late May 1 and found a woman with a broken lower lip and visible red marks on her throat and back.

The woman said Tyson Richard Gerhardt, 39, had been drinking, which led to an argument. Gerhardt eventually got angry with the woman and shoved a cigarette into her mouth, breaking her lip. He then grabbed her by the throat, began to choke her, raised his fist at her and, still holding her by the throat, pushed her through the screen door to the back porch.

She then ran outside, where a neighbor saw her bleeding and told Gerhardt to leave, which he did.

Sartin reported that the door had damage consistent with the woman’s story, and the neighbor provided a confirming witness statement.

Gerhardt was charged with aggravated assault and released on $7,500 bail.

April 28

• Fransisco Javier Sanchez-Aldrete, 34, Harrison, was charged with reckless endangerment, evading arrest, reckless driving, financial responsibility act, operating an unregistered vehicle, driving without a valid license or speed limit and being held without bail.

• Deborah Marie Sexton, 52, Philadelphia, was charged with probation violation and held on $2,000 bond.

• Brandi Michele Stewart, 40, Tellico Plains, was charged with capias-general sessions and released on $10,000 bond.

• Lerhonda Makayla Thaxton, 23, Lenoir City, was charged in capias criminal court and held on $25,000 bond.

April 29

• Christian Castro-Lopez, 21, of Loudon, was charged with simple possession/casual trading and public drunkenness and released on $2,000 bond.

• Tasha Ann Jamerson, 28, Madisonville, was charged with a probation violation and released on $2,000 bond.

• Owen Rylee Mills, 18, Oak Ridge, has been charged with reckless endangerment, possession of a handgun while under the influence, simple possession/casual trading, possession of drug paraphernalia, of breach of implied consent and driving by a minor while intoxicated and released on $28,000 bond.

• Charles Merlin Moore, 40, Nashville, was charged with public intoxication and released on $395 bond.

• Kimberly Anne Stringfellow, 46, Knoxville, was charged with driving under the influence and speeding and released on $2,000 bond.

April 30

• Jason Scott Buckner, 26, Knoxville, was charged with domestic assault and released on $1,000 bond.

• Matthew Allen Childress, 20, Loudon, was charged with two counts of general session capias and released on $34,000 bond.

• Terry Chadwick Johnson, 46, Lenoir City, was charged with driving under the influence and released on $1,000 bond.

• Rodney Allen McAllister, 39, Friendsville, has been charged with driving under the influence, breach of implied consent, breach of financial responsibility law and driving in lanes and being held without bond.

• Freddy Medina Gonzalez, 32, Lenoir City, was charged with driving under the influence and capias-general sessions and held on $1,500 bond.

• Alfredo Moreno, 33, of Philadelphia, was charged with driving under the influence and breach of implied consent and released on $1,500 bond.

• James Chester Newell, 36, Lenoir City, was charged with two counts of seizure-juvenile court, probation violation and two counts of capias-city court and is being held on $2,050 bond $.

• Nestor Josue Sarat Gomez, 20, Lenoir City, was charged with driving under the influence, violation of implied consent, financial responsibility law, driving without a valid license and driving in designated traffic lanes and released on 2 $500.

• Tayler Leigh Savely, 27, Lenoir City, was charged with public intoxication and released on $390 bond.

1st May

• Andrew Blake Frye, 22, of Lenoir City, was charged with driving under the influence and released on $1,500 bond.

• Kyle Christopher Johnston, 36, Knoxville, was charged with driving under the influence, possession of drug paraphernalia, breach of implied consent and driving with a suspended license and released on $5,500 bond $.

• Marty Allen Mills, 39, Lenoir City, was charged in Capias City Court and held on $2,000 bond.

• Alfonso Severiano Campos, 29, Lenoir City, was charged with driving under the influence, breach of implied consent and driving with a revoked/suspended license and released on $2,500 bond.

May 2nd

• Crystal Michele Clancy, 34, Maynardville, was charged with contempt of court and probation violation and is being held on $11,000 bond.

• Corey Douglas Coffey, 24, of Athens, was charged with possession of a handgun while under the influence and simple possession/casual trade and released on $3,000 bond.

• Jesse Roy Parton, 26, Athens, was charged with simple possession/casual trade, driving under the influence, breach of implied consent and due care and held without bond.

• Rene Orellana Pena, 40, Lenoir City, has been charged with evading arrest, driving under the influence and breach of implied consent and being held without bond.

• Phillip Gregory Sloan, 30, Maryville, was charged with probation violation and held on $4,000 bond.

• Priscilla Pamela White, 38, Knoxville, was charged with violation of probation and capias-general sessions and held on $6,000 bond.

May 3

• Cory Ray Cheatam, 34, Lenoir City, was charged with capias-general sessions and held on $4,000 bond.

• Brittney Dawn Russell, 35, Friendsville, was charged with garnishment in juvenile court and released on $500 bond.

• Laura Jean Winckler, 51, Loudon, was charged in Capias Municipal Court and released on $233 bond.

May 4

• Alex Joseph Chambers, 21, Knoxville, was charged with capias-general sessions and released on $1,000 bond.

• Joseph Lee Goins, 40, Lenoir City, was charged with two counts of bail restriction violation and released on $10,000 bond.

• Trevor Adam Hart, 21, Lenoir City, was charged with domestic assault and released on $1,000 bond.

• Johnathan Eugene Joiner, 65, Lenoir City, has been charged with breach of a protective order/injunction and is being held on $1,500 bond.

• Roger Ward Jones, 65, Knoxville, was charged with capias-general sessions and released on $1,000 bond.

• Carl Joseph Kress Jr., 40, of Philadelphia, was charged with capias-general sessions and held without bond.

• Whitney Amanda Lynn, 37, Philadelphia, was charged with criminal impersonation and probation violation and held without bail.

• Johnny Wayne Parker, 60, homeless, was charged with public intoxication and held on $283 bail.

• Michael Lynn Sloan, 47, McMinn, was charged with expired certificates and plates and driving with a revoked/suspended license and released on $1,000 bond.

• Jennifer Danielle Tipton, 41, homeless, was charged with smuggling through a correctional facility and held on $10,000 bond.

• Kyle Jordan Whitehead, 26, Maryville, was presided over with two counts of failing to appear in criminal court and was released on $10,000 bond.

May 5

• Samir Joseph Awais, 31, Knoxville, was charged with capias-general sessions and released on $1,000 bond.

• Adam Corey Claxton, 35, Lenoir City, has been charged with aggravated assault, resisting arrest and public intoxication and being held without bond.

• Abigail Marie Hutchinson, 20, Clinton, was charged with Simple Possession/Casual Trading, Possession of Drug Paraphernalia, and Manufacture, Delivery, Sale or Possession of Methamphetamine and released on $24,000 bond.

• Shawn Christopher Russell Jones, 23, Knoxville, was charged with public intoxication and held without bond.

• Mayron Noel Mendez-Montoya, 33, Lenoir City, was charged in Capias City Court and released on $400 bond.

• Vernon Bradley Noble, 35, Sweetwater, was charged with resisting arrest and being held without bond.

• Richard Warren Shephard, 44, Lenoir City, was charged with probation violation and being held on $25,000 bond.

• Brian Alan Tilley, 43, Madisonville, was charged with Manufacture, Delivery, Sale or Possession of Methamphetamine and released on $5,000 bond.

• Timothy Allen Tincher, 38, Greenback, was charged with theft of property and released on $10,000 bond.

May 6

• Andrei Bystry, 41, Madisonville, was charged with resisting arrest, possession of a handgun while under the influence, leaving the scene of the accident with property damage and driving under the influence and released on $10,000 bond.

• Michael Thomas Driggers, 41, Harriman, was charged with two counts of failing to appear at general sessions and released on $5,000 bond.

• Jacklyn Marie Frye, 38, Madisonville, was charged with theft of property and released on $7,500 bond.

• Kimberly Beth Gignac, 47, Lenoir City, was charged with disorderly conduct and released on $1,000 bond.

• Christopher Keith Walker, 27, Loudon, has been charged with theft of property and evading arrest and being held without bond.

May 7

• Jazzdin Kyle Cooper, 30, Deerlodge, was charged in Capias City Court and held without bail.

• Jessica Marie Gaskins, 34, Batavia, Ohio, was charged with driving with a suspended license and released on $4,000 bond.

• Preston Allen Jeffers, 31, Kingsport, was charged with purchase/sale/receipt/possession of stolen property, two counts of simple possession/casual exchange, possession of drug paraphernalia and manufacture, delivery , sale or possession of methamphetamine and held without bond .

• Raven Kieri Kiser, 31, Sullivan, has been charged with two counts of Simple Possession/Casual Trading, Possession of Drug Paraphernalia and Manufacture, Delivery, Sale or Possession of Methamphetamine and Held Without Bail.

• Irvin Ray Meade Jr., 39, Lenoir City, was charged with child abuse or neglect/endangerment and held without bond.

• Patrick Jordan Pippin, 20, Knoxville, was charged with violation of general probation sessions and released on $2,000 bond.

May 8

• John Terry Barber, 41, Lenoir City, was charged with financial responsibility, misuse of registration evidence and driving with a revoked/suspended license and being held without bond.

• Allen Cleveland Hoover, 41, Prattville, Alabama, has been charged with Manufacture, Sale, Delivery, Resale of a Schedule II Substance, Manufacture, Delivery, Sale or Possession of Methamphetamine and Driving with a Revoked/Suspended License and held without bail.

• James David Humphrey, 28, Lenoir City, was charged with domestic assault and held without bond.

• Sheri Marie Rose, 34, Troy, Ohio, was charged with resisting arrest and misusing the 911 emergency system and being held without bail.

• Charles Anthony Shubert, 42, Pigeon Forge, was charged with a probation violation and released on $2,000 bond.

May 9

• Daniel Thomas Brooks, 18, Lenoir City, was charged with forcible confinement and held without bond.

Estimated Air Fryer Market Size, Segmentation, Future Scope, Revenue Opportunities and Growth Factor – Instant Interview

0

Considering client’s requirements, influential research report on Air Fryer market has been crafted with professional and comprehensive study. This outstanding market report assesses the current market status, market size and market share, revenue generated from the sale of the product, and essential changes required in future products. It facilitates the process of gaining valuable market insights with new skills, latest tools, and innovative programs that are sure to help achieve business goals. A global Air Fryer Market report also contains a comprehensive study of product specification, revenue, cost, price, gross capacity and production.

The Air Fryer Market activity report comprises the most recent market information with which companies can acquire in-depth analysis of the Air Fryer Market industry and future trends. By taking inspiration from the marketing strategies of its competitors, companies can set up inventive ideas and striking sales targets which, in turn, allow them to gain a competitive advantage over their competitors. With the market insights provided in this report, it has become easy to gain a global perspective for international business. Thus, Air Fryer Market analysis report is an essential tool for increasing business activities, doing quality work and increasing profit.

Market analysis and overview of Air fryer market

Growing consumer health awareness and awareness has propelled the demand for air fryers all over the world. Data Bridge Market Research analyzes that the air fryer market will witness a CAGR of 10.7% during the forecast period.

Download a Sample Full PDF Copy of the Report with Global Industry Analysis: (Including Full TOC, List of Tables and Figures, Chart) at:

https://www.databridgemarketresearch.com/request-a-sample/?dbmr=global-air-fryer-market&SR

Competitive Analysis: Global Air fryer market

The key players covered in Air Fryers report are Koninklijke Philips NV, BLACK+DECKER Inc., Conair Corporation, AvalonBay, Inc., Breville Pty Ltd, Meyer Corporation, GoWISE USA, NuWave, LLC., Groupe SEB, Newell Brands, TATUNGUSA.COM, De’Longhi Appliances Srl, Ming’s Mark Inc., Bajaj Electricals Ltd, American Micronic Instruments (India) Private Limited, Gorenje, Gourmia, Inc., homeleader, Domu Brands Limited and Basix-Living among others national and global actors.

(Take a sample report now)

  • The report analyzes the competitive landscape of the Air Fryer market and offers information about several vendors in the market.
  • It offers additional highlights and key points about various Air Fryer market segments and their impact in the coming years.
  • The sample report includes the latest market drivers and trends.
  • Comprehensive information on factors that will contribute to the Air Fryer Market growth over the next five years.
  • The report offers predictions on upcoming trends and changes in consumer behavior.
  • In-depth study involving Air Fryer Market Types, Applications, and End Users.
  • To learn more about Air Fryer Market t Dynamics, access our free sample report.

The impact of COVID-19 on the Air Fryer market demand is considered while estimating the current and forecast market size and market growth trends for all regions and countries based on the following data points:

  1. Assessment of the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic
    • North America
    • Europe
    • Asia Pacific
    • Latin America
    • Middle East and Africa
  1. Asia-Pacific Air Fryer Market Quarterly Revenue Forecast
  2. Key strategies companies are undertaking to fight COVID-19
  3. Long-term dynamics
  4. Short-term dynamics

Table of Contents: Global Air Fryer Market

1. Introduction

2 Air Fryer Market Segmentation

3 Executive Summary

4 Premium Preview

5 Air Fryer Market Overview

6 Impact of Covid-19 on Air Fryer in Industry

7 Global Air Fryer Market, by Product Type

8 Global Air Fryer Market, by Modality

9 Global Air Fryer Market, by Type

10 Global Air Fryer Market, By Mode

11 Global Air Fryer Market, By End User

12 Global Air Fryer Market, By Geography

13 Global Air Fryer Market, Company Landscape

14 SWOT Analysis

15 company profiles

16 Quiz

17 related reports

Ask the analyst to customize and explore these premium research reports with table of contents and list of figures:

https://www.databridgemarketresearch.com/toc/?dbmr=global-air-fryer-market&SR

Air Fryer Market Covers the Following Key Information and Findings:

  • Exclusive summary: Basic statistics on the global air fryer market.
  • The changing effect on Air Fryer market dynamics: the global part provides drivers, trends, challenges and opportunities; post-COVID analysis.
  • View 2022 by type, end user, and region/nation.
  • To assess the industry by market segments, countries/regions, manufacturers/companies, revenue share and sales of these companies in these various regions of major countries/regions
  • To understand the structure of Air Fryer market by identifying its various subsegments.
  • The researchers shed light on market dynamics, such as drivers, restraints, trends, and opportunities.
  • It offers massive data about the trending factors that will influence the progress of the market.
  • In-depth understanding of Air Fryer Market drivers, restraints, and major micro-markets.
  • Regional analysis: The Asia-Pacific region will stand firm on its leading position in the industry.
  • Free customization of reports: This report can be customized according to the specific needs of the client.
  • Main strategic developments: The study also includes the key strategic developments of the market, new product launch, comprising R&D, mergers and acquisitions, collaborations, joint ventures, agreements, partnerships, and regional growth of the key competitors operating in the market globally and regionally.

Benefits of Buying Air Fryer Market Reports:

  • Client satisfaction: Our team of experts supports you in all your study needs and optimizes your reports.
  • Analyst Support: Before or after buying the report, ask a professional analyst to answer your questions.
  • Quality assured: Emphasizes the accuracy and quality of reports.
  • Incomparable skills: Analysts provide detailed information on reports

Browse other related reports:

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/fertility-supplements-market-with-analysis-segmentation-manufacturing-cost-analysis-including-key-raw-materials-trends-by-types-key-suppliers- and-forecast-2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/caffeinated-beverage-market-with-analysis-analysis-growth-by-top-companies-trends-by-types-and-application-forecast-analysis-2022- 05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/smokeless-tobacco-products-market-with-analysis-industry-share-size-trends-demand-dynamics-growth-demand-and-2028-forecasts-2022- 05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/europe-sugar-substitutes-market-top-leading-countries-companies-consumption-drivers-trends-forces-analysis-revenue-challenges-and-global-forecast- 2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/fish-meal-market-with-2022–industry-forecast-with-recent-trends-size-share-statistics-competition-strategies-application-region-and- analysis-2029-2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/banana-flour-market-with-2022-emerging-technologies-sales-revenue-key-players-analysis-development-assessment-and-industry-expansion-strategies- 2029-2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/plant-based-protein-supplements-market-with-global-industry-growth-analysis-segmentation-size-share-trend-future-demand-and-leading- players-updates-by-prediction-2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/jojoba-oil-market-with-global-industry-size-analyzed-by-business-opportunity-development-growth-factors-applications-analysis-and-future- outlook-2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/north-america-collagen-market-with-worldwide-industry-forecast-with-trends-size-share-statistics-competition-strategies-application-region-and- analysis-2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/north-america-collagen-market-with-worldwide-industry-forecast-with-trends-size-share-statistics-competition-strategies-application-region-and- analysis-2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/non-chocolate-candy-market-with-global-leading-players-industry-updates-future-growth-business-prospects-forecast-with-trends-size- share-statistics-competition-strategies-by-forecast-2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/colored-contact-lenses-market-with-analysis-trends-industry-share-size-top-manufactures-and-forecast-report-2022-to-2029- 2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/folding-bicycle-market-with-analysis-2022–industry-share-size-trends-demand-revenue-growth-regional-segmentation-and-2029-forecast- 2022-05-09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/tote-bags-market-with-analysis-industry-analysis-share-size-statistics-demand-revenue-top-companies-and-forecast-2022-05- 09

https://www.marketwatch.com/press-release/alcohol-beverage-packaging-market-with-analysis-technology-study-competitive-strategies-new-project-investment-and-forecast-2022-05-09

XPEL Announces Record Revenue of $71.9 Million in the First Quarter of 2022; Revenue growth 38.6%; Gross margin 38.6%

0

SAN ANTONIO, May 10, 2022–(BUSINESS WIRE)–XPEL, Inc. (Nasdaq: XPEL), a global provider of protective films and coatings, today announced its results for the first quarter ended March 31, 2022.

Highlights of the first quarter of 2022:

  • Net earnings increased 14.0% to $7.8 million, or $0.28 per share, from $6.8 million, or $0.25 per share, in the same quarter of 2021.

  • EBITDA (Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization) increased 29.6% to $11.9 million, or 16.5% of revenue, from $9.2 million in the first quarter of 2021.1

  • Including costs associated with the company’s dealer conference, which did not take place in 2021 due to COVID-19, EBITDA would have increased 38.2% to $12.7 million or 17.6% of revenue and net income would have increased 23.2% to $8.4 million or $0.30 per share.

Ryan Pape, President and CEO of XPEL, said, “We delivered a strong first quarter to start 2022, despite continued challenges with new car inventory in the U.S. and the impacts of lockdowns related to the COVID in China. We have taken steps to navigate a unique set of circumstances where we are seeing strong retail demand with concurrent constraints on new car inventory. Despite this unusual environment, we believe we are well positioned to deliver strong results over the coming quarters.

For the quarter ended March 31, 2022:

Revenues. Revenue increased approximately $20.0 million or 38.6% to $71.9 million from $51.9 million in the first quarter last year.

Gross margin. Gross margin was 38.6% compared to 35.3% in the first quarter of 2021.

Expenses. Operating expenses increased to $17.7 million or 24.6% of sales from $9.7 million or 18.8% of sales in the same period last year.

Net revenue. Net income was $7.8 million, or $0.28 per basic and diluted share, compared to net income of $6.8 million, or $0.25 per basic and diluted share in the first quarter 2021.

EBITDA. EBITDA (Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation, and Amortization) was $11.9 million, or 16.5% of sales, compared to $9.2 million, or 17.7% of sales l ‘last year.1.

1 See reconciliation of non-GAAP financial measures below

Conference call information

The Company will host a conference call and webcast today, May 10, 2022 at 11:00 a.m. Eastern Time to discuss the Company’s first quarter 2022 results.

To access the live webcast, please visit the XPEL, Inc. website at www.xpel.com/investor.

To join the call by phone, dial (877) 545-0320 approximately five minutes before the scheduled start time. For international callers, please dial (973) 528-0002. Callers must use the access code: 822049.

A replay of the conference call will be available until June 9, 2022 and can be accessed by dialing (877) 481-4010. International callers can dial (919) 882-2331. Callers should use conference ID: 45329.

About XPEL, Inc.

XPEL is a leading supplier of protective films and coatings, including automotive paint protection films, surface protection films, automotive and architectural window films, and ceramic coatings. With a global footprint, a network of trained installers and proprietary DAP software, XPEL is committed to exceeding customer expectations by providing high quality products, industry-leading customer service, expert technical support and training. world class. XPEL, Inc. is listed on the Nasdaq under the symbol “XPEL”.

Safe Harbor Statement

This release contains forward-looking statements regarding XPEL, Inc. and its business, which may include, but are not limited to, the intended use of proceeds from capital transactions, expansion into new markets, and execution of the business growth strategy. Often, but not always, forward-looking statements can be identified by the use of words such as “anticipates”, “is planned”, “expects”, “is planned”, “intends”, ” contemplates”, “anticipates”, “believes”, “proposes” or variations (including negative variations) of these words and phrases, or states that certain actions, events or results “may”, “could”, “might” , “could” or “will” be taken, occur or be reached. These statements are based on the current expectations of the management of XPEL. The forward-looking events and circumstances described in this release may not occur on certain specified dates or may not occur at all and may differ materially due to known and unknown risk factors and uncertainties affecting the business, performance and acceptance of company products, economic factors, competition, general stock markets, and many other factors beyond XPEL’s control. Although XPEL has attempted to identify important factors that could cause actual actions, events or results to differ materially from those described in the forward-looking statements, there may be other factors that cause actual actions, events or results differ from those anticipated, estimated or expected. . No forward-looking statement can be guaranteed. Except as required by applicable securities laws, forward-looking statements speak only as of the date they are made, and XPEL undertakes no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement, whether whether as a result of new information, future events, or otherwise.

XPEL, INC.

Condensed Consolidated Statements of Income (unaudited)

(Unaudited)

Three months completed

March, 31st,

2022

2021

Revenue

Product revenue

$

58,097,446

$

44,931,353

Service revenue

13,766,321

6,934,761

Total revenue

71,863,767

51 866 114

Cost of sales

Product cost of sales

38,193,987

31,546,547

Service cost

5,953,347

2,033,136

Total cost of sales

44,147,334

33,579,683

Gross margin

27,716,433

18,286,431

Functionnary costs

Sales and Marketing

6,311,220

3,387,830

general and administrative

11,369,291

6,351,491

Total operating expenses

17,680,511

9,739,321

Operating result

10,035,922

8,547,110

Interest expense

219,726

52,719

Exchange loss

5,126

35,612

income before taxes

9,811,070

8,458,779

income tax expense

2,007,938

1,611,720

Net revenue

7,803,132

6,847,059

Earnings per share

Basic

$

0.28

$

0.25

Diluted

$

0.28

$

0.25

Weighted average number of ordinary shares

Basic

27,612,597

27,612,597

Diluted

27,612,597

27,612,597

XPEL, INC.

Condensed consolidated balance sheets

(Unaudited)

(Checked)

March 31, 2022

The 31st of December,

2021

Assets

Fluent

Cash and cash equivalents

$

10,595,557

$

9,644,248

Accounts receivable, net

15,178,627

13,159,036

Inventory, net

74,486,843

51 936 164

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

3,749,690

3,671,657

Income tax receivable

617 141

Total current assets

104 010 717

79 028 246

Property and equipment, net

11,364,205

9,898,126

Lease assets with right of use

14,443,369

12,909,607

Intangible assets, net

31,977,505

32,732,771

Other non-current assets

851 431

790 339

Good will

25,614,110

25,655,428

Total assets

$

188 261 337

$

161 014 517

Passives

Fluent

Current portion of notes payable

$

351,674

$

375 413

Lease liabilities of the current part

3,732,825

2,977,794

Accounts payable and accrued liabilities

42,357,330

32,914,615

Income tax payable

656,090

Total current liabilities

47,097,919

36,267,822

Deferred tax liability, net

2,702,639

2,748,283

Other long-term liabilities

2,429,332

2,630,486

Line of credit borrowings

33,000,000

25,000,000

Non-current portion of rental debts

10,790,979

9,830,128

Non-current portion of notes payable

75,717

Total responsibilities

96 020 869

76,552,436

Commitments and contingencies (note 11)

Equity

Preferred shares, par value $0.001; allowed 10,000,000; none issued and outstanding

Common shares, par value $0.001; 100,000,000 shares authorized; 27,612,597 issued and outstanding

27,613

27,613

Premium

10,651,532

10,581,483

Accumulated other comprehensive income

(685,240

)

(590,446

)

Retained earnings

82,246,563

74,443,431

Full shareholder equity

92 240 468

84,462,081

Total Liabilities and Equity

$

188 261 337

$

161 014 517

Reconciliation of Non-GAAP Financial Measures

EBITDA is a non-GAAP financial measure. EBITDA is defined as net profit (loss) plus interest expense plus income tax expense plus amortization expense and amortization expense. EBITDA should be considered supplemental to, and not a substitute for, or superior to financial measures calculated in accordance with GAAP. It is not a measure of our financial performance under GAAP and should not be considered an alternative to revenue or net income, as applicable, or any other performance measure derived in accordance with GAAP and may not be comparable to similarly titled measures of other companies. . EBITDA has limitations as an analytical tool and you should not consider it in isolation or as a substitute for analyzing our results of operations as reported under GAAP.

EBITDA does not reflect the impact of certain cash charges resulting from matters that we believe are not indicative of ongoing operations and other companies in our industry may calculate EBITDA differently from us, which limits its usefulness as a comparative measure.

EBITDA reconciliation

(Unaudited)

Three months completed

March, 31st,

2022

2021

Net revenue

7,803,132

6,847,059

Interest

219,726

52,719

Taxes

2,007,938

1,611,720

Depreciation

756,344

383,090

Amortization

$

1,076,466

$

262,606

EBITDA

$

11,863,606

$

9,157,194

See the source version on businesswire.com: https://www.businesswire.com/news/home/20220510005456/en/

contacts

Investor Relations:
John Nesbett/Jennifer Belodeau
IMS Investor Relations
Phone: (203) 972-9200
Email: [email protected]

Idaho Lieutenant Governor McGeachin will end the year with a budget deficit

BOISE, Idaho (AP) — Republican Lt. Governor Janice McGeachin, who is running for governor, has a $2,000 budget shortfall in her office that will need to be taken from next year’s appropriations.

Documents obtained by The Associated Press show the state comptroller’s office plans to withhold McGeachin’s salary this fiscal year, which ends June 30, and then offset that salary next year.

That plan depends, according to a letter Friday from the state comptroller’s office to Alex Adams, administrator of Idaho’s financial management division, on McGeachin exercising fiscal responsibility.

The letter described McGeachin’s mismanagement of his budget as leading to the shortfall.

Adams sent the state comptroller’s letter to McGeachin on Monday. In a letter to McGeachin last week, Adams called the situation “unprecedented.”

McGeachin’s office did not immediately respond to a message from The Associated Press.

The lieutenant governor’s salary is set by law, which limits the ability of state officials to reduce McGeachin’s salary.

McGeachin will not be lieutenant governor next year. Any deficit she left would become the responsibility of the next lieutenant governor.

McGeachin hired a private attorney in a wasted effort to avoid leaking public records and was ordered to pay $29,000 in legal fees.

Earlier this year, lawmakers denied McGeachin’s request for money to cover those costs.

Florida Republicans’ feud with Mickey Mouse highlights growing gap between historic GOP best friends and corporate America

0

There is a growing rift between corporate America and the GOP — two groups that have long been friends.

The latest incident involves Disney and its decision to speak out against a Florida law that prevents the teaching of sexual orientation or gender identity in kindergarten through third grade. State Republicans, including the governor, reacted with fury, voting to strip Disney of the special tax and self-governing privileges it has held for 55 years.

The spat follows rows between the GOP and corporate America over restrictive ballot measures and toilet bills. In 2021, Senate Minority Leader Mitch McConnell bluntly warned corporations to “stay out of politics” – although he later softened his tone.

Meanwhile, Democrats are trying to capitalize on the divide.

As a professor of management, I study how the values ​​and political views of business leaders affect the decisions they make on behalf of their companies. While I think CEOs are partly responsible for the growing divide between business and the GOP, that’s not the only factor driving it.

A close relationship relaxes

The close relationship between corporate America and the Republican Party dates back to the 1970s. Corporations provided financial support to conservative war chests and in return received pro-corporate policies, such as lower corporate taxes and regulations.

The alliance has undoubtedly been a success for large companies. Corporate taxes as a share of U.S. gross domestic product are just about 1%, the lowest since the 1930s and down from 4.1% in 1967.

But that union has become increasingly strained in recent years over a range of social issues, particularly regarding LGBTQ rights.

For example, in 2015, many companies, including Apple and Walmart, spoke out against so-called religious freedom laws, like the one passed in Indiana, that would allow companies to discriminate against LGBTQ customers. The following year, there was a similar corporate backlash to North Carolina’s ban on public restroom use for transgender people. Boycotts by several companies, including PayPal and the NCAA, led to a partial repeal in 2017.

Companies have also been vocal during former President Donald Trump’s presidency on issues such as his ban on travel to Muslim-majority countries and his comments following the rally of white supremacists in Charlottesville, Virginia. To some, it seemed that the role he and other Republicans played in laying the groundwork for the January 6, 2021 insurrection on Capitol Hill may have been the final straw, as dozens of companies, including AT&T and Marriott, said they would cut donations to the 147 Republicans who voted against certifying President Joe Biden’s election.

The push for more restrictive electoral laws continues the battle over the election. Republicans in states across the country cite alleged fraud in the 2020 election — despite no evidence there was — as the impetus behind their push.

And as the Supreme Court debates whether to overturn Roe v. Wade said the landmark decision upholding women’s right to an abortion, the issue is certain to drive further wedges between Republicans and companies, some of which have indicated they will support employees who want to terminate a pregnancy.

Why have companies become more outspoken in recent years and willing to upend an alliance that has helped them lower their tax bills and regulatory hurdles?

My research suggests that there are three driving forces for this trend.

CEOs do “what we think is right”

The CEO is the main decision-maker of the company, which means that his political leanings can be reflected in business decisions.

And in recent years, the CEOs of some of America’s biggest companies have cited their own personal values ​​as a reason for speaking out on social issues. As Bank of America CEO Brian Moynihan told The Wall Street Journal in 2016, “Our job as CEOs now is to drive what we believe is right.”

In my own research, I’ve found that a CEO’s political affiliation can affect how a company spends money. CEOs who donate primarily to Democrats tend to spend more on their employees, community activities and environmental issues, regardless of how profitable their company is. In other words, they seem to believe it’s just the right thing to do.

Republican CEOs, meanwhile, tend to tie spending on outside issues to financial performance, reflecting the idea that corporations are primarily accountable to shareholders.

More recent research also demonstrates that liberal executives tend to pay more attention to gender diversity within their companies and are less likely to downsize when economic conditions deteriorate, consistent with the values ​​that liberals hold. the priority.

But relatively few CEOs are staunchly liberal, so the CEO’s impact on this trend may be limited. A recent study found that only about 18% of the more than 3,500 people who served as CEOs of Standard & Poor’s 1500 companies from 2000 to 2017 donated primarily to Democratic candidates, while 58% donated primarily to Republicans. .

Growing worker activism

Employees also play an important role in corporate activism.

Recent management research shows that companies with more liberal employees spend more resources on improving gender and racial diversity and sustainability issues. Similarly, a 2019 study found that companies are more likely to give in to activist demands on issues such as cutting carbon emissions and raising frontline workers’ pay when they have a workforce. more liberal work.

Companies can respond to research showing the benefits of listening to their employees and showing that their voice matters. For example, workers tend to show more trust and commitment to a company when they feel it shares their values, leading to higher productivity. A 2017 survey found that 89% of employees said they would accept a reduced salary to work at a company whose values ​​match their own.

Other research shows that engaging in social activities such as environmental protection results in less employee turnover.

In my own research, which tracked corporate engagement on same-sex marriage issues in the 2000s and 2010s, I found that the likelihood of CEOs speaking out on same-sex marriage increased significantly when there was more employees donating to Democrats – which was true even when the CEO was conservative.

Popular opinion tracking

Public opinion is another factor behind the growing rift with the GOP.

Business leaders tend to follow public opinion because they want to minimize the risk of losing customers for their products and services.

The same-sex marriage debate is a good example. Public support for allowing gay people to marry first exceeded 50% in 2011 – it is now at 70%. Until then, very few CEOs had made a public statement on the issue, according to my research on same-sex marriage. Once popular opinion reaches halfway, however, many more companies — including those run by conservative CEOs — begin to come out in favor of it. Interestingly, even liberal CEOs said very little until 2011, including those who were already offering their employees domestic partner benefits.

And more recently, it has become even more critical for companies to consider public opinion when deciding to take a stand on a burning issue. Indeed, their younger customers, especially millennials, are increasingly saying that CEOs have a responsibility to speak up and that they would be more likely to buy products if they did.

When it comes to election laws, a recent poll found that most people support legislation that makes it easier, not harder, to vote.

who leaves who

But corporate America isn’t necessarily moving away from the Republican Party to move closer to the Democrats.

Instead, the companies are trying to convey that their concerns are not partisan in nature. The more than 100 companies that in 2021 signed a statement supporting voter rights and against bills that would restrict access underlined this point.

I believe that a closer examination of the three main factors – in particular the role of workers and the public – behind the growth of corporate activism suggests something else. Companies are not straying from the Grand Old Party. On the contrary, the GOP appears to be drifting, not just from corporate America, but also from the opinions of the American public — especially millennials.

This is an updated version of an article published on April 22, 2021.

This Singaporean startup is reinventing the instant noodle

0
Christoph Langwallner, co-founder and CEO of What if food, wants to change that. His startup is on a mission to diversify the food system with an eco-friendly crop that Langwallner says can restore degraded land, reduce water consumption, improve our diets and increase food security: the Bambara groundnut.
Hardy and drought-resistant, the bambara peanut is a type of legume – the same food family as peanuts, peas and beans – native to West Africa, but now grown across the continent and in Asia.
As a legume, it enriches the soil with nitrogen, which helps fertilize other crops. It is also a “complete food” which is rich in protein, carbohydrates and fiber, providing essential amino acids, minerals and vitamins. A traditional ingredient in indigenous African cuisine, the harvest has been widely marketed and consumed locally – until now.

Singapore-based WhatIf Foods processes Bambara groundnut into its signature “BamNut” flour which it uses in instant noodles, soups and shakes. Langwallner hopes to create a new market for the crop and “make Bambara groundnut part of the system”.

Planet positive noodles

Langwallner, who has worked with food tech companies in the past, says he saw an opportunity to introduce the unfamiliar peanut through a familiar product: instant noodles. In 2020, more than 116 billion servings of fast food were consumed.

WhatIf launched its noodles in Singapore in 2020, replacing the frying process used in the production of conventional instant noodles with a healthier method similar to air frying.

This proprietary technique reduces the fat content of WhatIf noodles and avoids the use of palm oil, an ingredient linked to deforestation and soil and water pollution, says Langwallner. The noodles also contain more fiber and protein than conventional wheat-based instant noodles.
Priced at $2.50 per serving, WhatIf’s noodles are more expensive than products from industry stalwarts like Nissin and Indomie – but Langwallner is betting on the will of environmentally conscious consumersespecially the millennial and Gen Z market, to pay more for a sustainable product.

Limited supply

Although it is very nutritious and good for the soil, the bambara bean is cultivated on a very small scale: the annual production in Africa would be hardly 0.3 million tons — a negligible amount compared to 776.6 million metric tons of wheat produced in the world last year.

This is because the bambara groundnut is not grown as a primary crop, says Victoria Jideani, professor of food science at Cape Peninsula University of Technology in South Africa. Farmers grow it to help fertilize the soil, and the resulting products are eaten and sold locally, she says.

But creating an international market for the harvest could provide new incentives for farmers – and bolster food security for future generations as climate change threatens production of some cropssaid Jideani.
Bambara groundnuts (pictured) are grown in semi-arid parts of Asia and Africa, including Ghana, where WhatIf works with more than 1,600 farmers.
According to the UN23 hectares of arable land are lost every minute due to drought and desertification, and studies found that aridity affects 40% of agricultural soils. Many areas of arable land, where major crops like maize used to grow, “no longer thrive”, says Jideani. It’s a major problem in Africawhere up to 65% of cultivated land is degraded.
But the Bambara groundnut is drought resistant and able to grow in poor soils in semi-arid regions while replenishing degraded lands, providing an alternative crop that could help restore those lands, says Jideani.

Companies like WhatIf could create global demand for this “underutilized” culture, says Jideani. “The interaction we had with (the farmers) indicates that they are looking for a market,” she says.

How lab-grown sushi could help fight overfishing
And Langwaller is not alone in exploring the potential of culture: Jideani and her team are experimenting with Bambara pea products including crackers, cakes and tofu.

Jideani says she would like to see governments encourage Bambara groundnut production. “Any culture that presents itself as a solution for the future must be seized with both hands,” she says.

“A totally different approach”

So far, Langwallner and co-founder Peter Cheetham, a biochemical engineer, have invested their own money to run the company, as well as raising funds from friends and private investors. Langwallner says they are now looking for institutional investors to help the company grow.

WhatIf dairy-free BamNut milk is high in protein and dietary fiber.

The company is working on its first step: sourcing 1,000 metric tonnes of Bambara groundnuts from West Africa, which Langwallner says would restore up to 1,000 hectares of land by the end of the year. end of 2023. It works directly with 1,600 farmers in Ghana and builds relationships with farmers in Nigeria and Malaysia as it prepares for future expansion. Langwallner declined to share sales numbers with CNN Business.

WhatIf’s products are manufactured in its factories in Malaysia and Australia, and sold in Singapore, Malaysia and Australia. This month, they are rolling out in the US to online stores. The company is also working on regulatory approval in the EU, which it expects to obtain later this year.

Going forward, WhatIf wants to “localize production” by building factories closer to its peanut supply, or closer to consumers, says Langwallner. And the company is expanding its product line. He recently launched BamNut milkand explores the development of other plant-based dairy products such as yogurt and cheese.

By taking a “totally different approach”, Langwallner hopes Bambara groundnuts will help farmers around the world revitalize degraded lands and diversify our diets for a safer future.

Is 22nd Century Group (NASDAQ:XXII) in a good position to invest in growth?

0

Just because a company isn’t making money doesn’t mean the stock will go down. For example, although software-as-a-service company Salesforce.com lost money for years as it grew recurring revenue, if you had held stock since 2005, you would have done very well. But while history boasts of these rare successes, those who fail are often forgotten; who remembers Pets.com?

So the natural question for 22nd Century Band (NASDAQ:XXII) shareholders is whether they should be concerned about its cash burn rate. For the purposes of this article, cash burn is the annual rate at which an unprofitable business spends money to finance its growth; its negative free cash flow. The first step is to compare its cash consumption with its cash reserves, to give us its “cash trail”.

See our latest analysis for 22nd Century Group

How long is the 22nd Century Group cash trail?

You can calculate a company’s cash trail by dividing the amount of cash it has on hand by the rate at which it spends that money. When 22nd Century Group last published its balance sheet in March 2022, it had no debt and cash worth $39 million. Last year, its cash burn was $28 million. So it had a cash trail of about 16 months from March 2022. Not too bad, but it’s fair to say that the end of the cash trail is in sight unless the consumption of cash does drastically decrease. You can see how his cash balance has changed over time in the image below.

debt-equity-history-analysis

How far is 22nd Century Group growing?

22nd Century Group has actually increased its cash burn by 83% over the past year, showing that it is driving investment in the business. It gives us pause, and we can’t take comfort from the 19% operating revenue growth over the same period. In light of the above data, we are quite optimistic about the company’s growth trajectory. Obviously, however, the crucial factor is whether the company will expand its business in the future. You might want to take a look at the company’s expected growth over the next few years.

Can 22nd Century Group raise more money easily?

While 22nd Century Group appears to be in a pretty good position, it’s still worth considering how easily it could raise more cash, if only to fuel faster growth. Issuing new shares or going into debt are the most common ways for a listed company to raise more funds for its business. One of the main advantages of publicly traded companies is that they can sell shares to investors to raise funds and finance their growth. We can compare a company’s cash burn to its market capitalization to get an idea of ​​how many new shares a company would need to issue to fund a year’s operations.

22nd Century Group has a market capitalization of $290 million and spent $28 million last year, or 9.7% of the company’s market value. This is a small proportion, so we think the company would be able to raise more cash to fund growth, with a bit of dilution, or even just borrow money.

Is 22nd Century Group’s cash burn a concern?

Even though its growing cash burn makes us a bit nervous, we are bound to mention that we think 22nd Century Group’s cash burn relative to its market capitalization is relatively promising. Cash-burning businesses are always on the riskier side of things, but after considering all the factors discussed in this short article, we’re not too worried about its cash burn rate. Readers should have a good understanding of business risks before investing in a stock, and we have spotted 3 warning signs for 22nd Century Group potential shareholders should consider before investing in a stock.

Sure 22nd Century Group may not be the best stock to buy. So you might want to see this free collection of companies offering a high return on equity, or this list of stocks that insiders buy.

Feedback on this article? Concerned about content? Get in touch with us directly. You can also email the editorial team (at) Simplywallst.com.

This Simply Wall St article is general in nature. We provide commentary based on historical data and analyst forecasts only using unbiased methodology and our articles are not intended to be financial advice. It is not a recommendation to buy or sell stocks and does not take into account your objectives or financial situation. Our goal is to bring you targeted long-term analysis based on fundamental data. Note that our analysis may not take into account the latest announcements from price-sensitive companies or qualitative materials. Simply Wall St has no position in the stocks mentioned.

How Elliott Associates’ Proposal to Split Two Businesses at Western Digital Can Create Value

0

A Western Digital office building is shown in Irvine, California, U.S., January 24, 2017.

Mike Blake | Reuters

Company: Western Digital (WDC)

Activist: Elliott Associates

Percentage of ownership: ~6.0%

Average cost: n / A

Activist Comment: Elliott is a very successful and shrewd activist investor, especially in the technology sector. Their team includes analysts from leading technology private equity firms, engineers, operational partners – former CEOs and technology COOs. When evaluating an investment, they also hire specialist and general management consultants, expert cost analysts, and industry specialists. They often watch companies for many years before investing and have a large stable of impressive board candidates.

What is happening?

On May 3, 2022, Elliott sent a letter to Western Digital’s board of directors, expressing his belief that the company should spin off its NAND flash memory business. Elliott called on the board to conduct a full strategic review and expressed his belief that such a separation could lead to a stock price of more than $100 per share by the end of 2023.

In the wings

As new “activists” come onto the scene, we have seen a fair amount of “sell the business” activism without a detailed plan or reason. We have been very critical of this style of activism, deeming it short-term and greedy. Activists who did not understand why we were so critical should read Elliott’s letter as an example of a well-thought-out, deeply analyzed, and shareholder-focused strategic activism campaign. Elliott provides a detailed 13-page letter explaining why the two businesses of the company should be separated and a plan to achieve the separation that is in the best interests of shareholders.

The company is one of the world’s largest suppliers of storage components for data infrastructure and has built a successful hard drive business. However, the hard drive industry began a slow decline in 2013 as desktops and laptops switched to faster NAND flash solid-state drives (SSDs). Thus, in 2015 tthe company announced it would acquire SanDisk for $19 billion to enter the fastest-growing Flash industry. In the years following this acquisition, the hard drive industry rebounded and once again became a growth market, with Western Digital being one of the two main suppliers of this technology, behind Seagate. Western Digital is today the only company that works with both HDD and NAND flash.

Over the past six years, the company has underperformed in several areas. First, they attempted to realize the strategic synergies of a combined HDD and Flash portfolio, but lost market share in both HDD and Flash. Second, operational missteps have consistently led to missed financial targets, including compound annual growth rate of revenue, gross margins, operating expenses, and operating margin. Third, the company is showing poor stock market performance, with returns of -23.10%, 6.14%, and -39.57% over the past 1, 3, and 5-year periods versus -0.89%, 41 .07% and 74.0% for the S&P 500, respectively. .

In his letter, Elliott makes a compelling argument that the reason Western Digital is underperforming is because the two companies shouldn’t be owned by the same company. Both companies are strong and have a good market share, but would be much more valuable as stand-alone entities. Hard disk and flash are totally different technologies: spinning mechanical disks versus advanced solid-state devices. The manufacturing processes are distinct and although the companies share common customers, the products may compete in certain use cases.

Prior to the SanDisk acquisition, Western Digital consistently had a higher price-to-earnings ratio than its closest counterpart, Seagate. Since the acquisition, Seagate has had a significantly higher price-to-earnings ratio. Today, Western Digital has an enterprise value of $21 billion, compared to the combined pro forma enterprise value of Western Digital and SanDisk of $34 billion when they announced the acquisition there. is six years old, representing an impairment loss of $13 billion. In contrast, during the same period, Seagate increased its enterprise value from $17 billion to $22 billion. When Western Digital announced its acquisition of SanDisk, its stock was trading at $75 per share. Six years later, the stock has fallen almost 30% to $53 per share. During the same period, the S&P 500 and the Nasdaq rose 103% and 190%, respectively. Seagate (the company’s closest HDD counterpart) has outperformed Western Digital by 278% over the past decade, and Micron (its closest NAND counterpart) has outperformed Western Digital by 868% over the past decade. .

Elliott believes that Western Digital’s valuation today reflects the market view that owning HDD and Flash generates a conflict of synergies in terms of operational and financial performance. As a result, they are asking the company to explore a complete separation from the Flash business, which they believe could lead to a stock price of over $100 per share by the end of 2023, and they illustrate the way to get there.

Western Digital’s HDD business has a market share of 38% (compared to 46% for Seagate), revenue of $9.4 billion (compared to $12 billion for Seagate), a growth rate of 21% (compared to 18% for Seagate) and both companies have a gross profit margin of 30%. . Using Seagate’s multiples of 1.8x LTM revenue and 6.1x LTM gross profit, Western Digital’s HDD business would be worth $17 billion.

Western Digital’s flash business generates $10 billion in revenue and similar businesses have been acquired at multiples of 1.7 to 1.9 times revenue. This would attribute a minimum value of $17 billion to Flash activity. But this is not the normal call to strategic action. Elliott puts its money where its mouth is and offers over $1 billion in additional equity in Flash business at an enterprise value of $17 billion to $20 billion, which can be used either in a derivative transaction, either as equity financing in a sale or merger with a strategic partner. Essentially, Elliott is expressing its willingness to participate in the acquisition of the Flash business with a $1 billion investment. So Elliott sees each company valued at around $17 billion, while the company’s total enterprise value is $21 billion.

If Elliott secures the divestment of the Flash business at the value at which they are investing their own money, that would attribute a $4 billion valuation to the entire HDD business. There’s good reason to believe there are buyers for the Flash business, especially with a combination of Western Digital’s Flash business with joint venture partner Kioxia. Western Digital interest in acquiring Kioxia is well documented over the years, including a proposal in 2017 and the rumor $20 billion deal value last year (1.7 x LTM revenue). Over the past five years, Kioxia has been publicly rumored to receive interest from a long list of other strategic and financial parties.

Their plan may resonate favorably with the company’s current board and management team. The decision to acquire SanDisk predates the company’s CEO, David Goeckeler, and his management team, almost all of whom were hired in 2020 or later. In fact, Goeckeler’s first operational decision was to separate HDD and Flash within Western Digital. It’s not a big step for the board to separate it into a different company, especially since only two of Western Digital’s current ten directors served on the board for the SanDisk acquisition. Also, shareholder activism is about the power of persuasion and the power of argument, and Elliott makes a very compelling argument here.

It should also be noted that Elliott declared an investment of around $1 billion in the company, but did not file a 13D despite having a position of around 6%. Based on their history and philosophy, this is likely because Elliott uses swaps and other derivatives to construct its position and these types of securities are not required to be included in “beneficial ownership”. ” for the purposes of 13D repositories for the time being. The use of swaps in this manner is the subject of a current Securities and Exchange Commission proposal and could very well change in the short term, forcing Elliott to file a 13D in this investment.

Ken Squire is the founder and president of 13D Monitor, an institutional research service on shareholder activism, and he is the founder and portfolio manager of the 13D Activist Fund, a mutual fund that invests in a portfolio of activist investments 13D. Squire is also the creator of the AESG™ investment category, an activist style of investing focused on improving the ESG practices of portfolio companies.

Over $2 million stolen from DeFi platform MM.Finance

MM.Finance announced this week that hackers managed to steal $2 million worth of digital assets in a Domain Name System (DNS) attack.

These types of attacks involve hackers targeting the availability or stability of a network’s DNS service. The team behind MM.Finance – which bills itself as the largest decentralized financial ecosystem on the Cronos blockchain – said the attacker managed to “inject a malicious contract address into the front-end code”.

“The attacker used a DNS vulnerability to alter the router contract address in our hosted files. Fixing this issue comes first. We understand that some of you have lost significant funds and are filled with worries and panic,” the company said. said in an autopsy on Medium.

Users who interacted with the MM.Finance site from May 4 lost funds after swapping or adding and removing cash.

“When the victims browsed mm.finance to remove cash, the malicious router was triggered and the LPs were removed for the attacker’s address“, explained the company.

The attacker stole over $2 million in cryptocurrency before laundering it through Tornado Cash, a service that allows people to disguise the origin of funds.

The company is setting up a compensation pool for those affected and the team behind the platform said they will waive their share of trading fees to cover losses. The compensation pool will be open for 45 days, and the company has set up a system to reimburse those who have lost the cryptocurrency.

They also plan to hire a security firm to review their DNS configurations and will remove two of their service providers from their deployment stack to reduce their potential attack surface, the company said.

“We take this attack vector seriously and will make sure to do our best to eradicate these vectors,” the company added.

In follow-up posts on Twitter, the company said it had traced the stolen funds to the OKX exchange, threatening to call the FBI if the funds were not returned. The CEO of OKX mentioned he is studying the matter.

“As unethical as your actions are, we admit there is some crazy brilliance behind your design. So here’s the deal, return 90% of the funds you stole and we’ll drop this, no questions asked. You have 48 hours to return these funds. Right now it’s a win-win for us (time), you (risk and reward) and the community (recovery of stolen funds),” MM.Finance wrote on Twitter Thursday.

“If you refuse, we’ll just sleep less and make it worse, a cost we’re already so used to at MM. Your move.”

The company did not respond to requests for comment on the return of the funds.

Jonathan has worked around the world as a journalist since 2014. Before returning to New York, he worked for news outlets in South Africa, Jordan and Cambodia. He previously covered cybersecurity at ZDNet and TechRepublic.

Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Market Overview 2022-2029 | Main Players – Morpho (France), Symantec Corporation (US), Gemalto (Netherlands), Entrust Inc. (US), Broadcom

0

Latest Market Research Report Analyzes Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Market Demand by Different Segments Size, Share, Growth, Industry Trends and Forecast to 2028 in its Database, which portrays a systematic picture of the market and provides an in-depth explanation of the various factors that are expected to drive the growth of the market. The Universal Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Market Research Report is a high-quality report containing in-depth market research. It presents a definitive solution to gain market insights with which the market can be visualized clearly and thus important decisions for the growth of the business can be taken. All data, facts, figures and information covered in this business document are supported by renowned analytical tools including SWOT analysis and Porter’s five forces analysis. A number of steps are employed while preparing the Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) report considering the feedback from a dedicated team of researchers, analysts, and forecasters.

Get | Download Sample Copy with TOC, Charts and List of Figures @ https://www.marketresearchintellect.com/download-sample/?rid=283398

The predicted sale of a product is also included in this Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) market report which helps market players to bring new products to market and avoid errors. It suggests which parts of the business need to be improved for the business to succeed. It’s also easy to discover a new chance to stay ahead of the market, and this market research report provides the latest trends to help you place your business in the market and gain a significant advantage. .

One of the crucial parts of this report includes the leading vendor’s discussion of the Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) industry brand summary, profiles, market revenue, and financial analysis. The report will help market players to develop future business strategies and learn about the global competition. A detailed market segmentation analysis is done on producers, regions, type and applications in the report.

Major Players Covered in Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Markets:

  • Morpho (France)
  • Symantec Corporation (USA)
  • Gemalto (Netherlands)
  • Entrust Inc. (USA)
  • Broadcom
  • NEC (Japan)
  • HID Global (USA)
  • Fujitsu (Japan)
  • RSA Security (US)
  • VASCO Data Security (USA)
  • SecurEnvoy Ltd (England)
  • Deepnet Security (England)
  • Security Duo (USA)
  • CensorNet Ltd. (England)
  • Cross Match (USA)

Global Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Market Segmentation:

Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Market Split By Type:

  • Two-factor authentication
  • Three-factor authentication
  • Other

Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Market Split By Application:

  • Banking and finance
  • Government
  • travel and immigration
  • Military and Defense
  • Commercial Security
  • Consumer electronics
  • Health care
  • Other

The analysis in the study has been conducted across the globe and presents the current and traditional growth analysis, competition analysis, and growth prospects of the central regions. With industry-standard analytical accuracy and high data integrity, the report offers an excellent attempt to highlight major opportunities available in the global Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Market to assist players in establishing strong market positions. Buyers of the report can access verified and reliable market forecasts including those regarding the overall Global Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Market size in terms of sales and volume.

Get | Discount on the purchase of this report @ https://www.marketresearchintellect.com/ask-for-discount/?rid=283398

Scope of the Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Market Report

Report attribute Details
Market size available for years 2022 – 2030
Reference year considered 2021
Historical data 2018 – 2021
Forecast period 2022 – 2030
Quantitative units Revenue in USD Million and CAGR from 2022 to 2030
Segments Covered Types, applications, end users, and more.
Report cover Revenue Forecast, Business Ranking, Competitive Landscape, Growth Factors and Trends
Regional scope North America, Europe, Asia-Pacific, Latin America, Middle East and Africa
Scope of customization Free report customization (equivalent to up to 8 analyst business days) with purchase. Added or changed country, region and segment scope.
Pricing and purchase options Take advantage of personalized purchasing options to meet your exact research needs. Explore purchase options

Regional Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Market Analysis can be represented as follows:

This part of the report assesses key regional and country-level markets on the basis of market size by type and application, key players, and market forecast.

Based on geography, the global multi-factor authentication (MFA) market has been segmented as follows:

    • North America includes the United States, Canada and Mexico
    • Europe includes Germany, France, UK, Italy, Spain
    • South America includes Colombia, Argentina, Nigeria and Chile
    • Asia Pacific includes Japan, China, Korea, India, Saudi Arabia and Southeast Asia

For more information or query or customization before buying, visit @ https://www.marketresearchintellect.com/product/global-multi-factor-authentication-mfa-market-size-and-forecast/

About Us: Market Research Intellect

Market Research Intellect provides syndicated and customized research reports to clients across various industries and organizations with the aim of providing personalized and in-depth research studies.

Our advanced analytical research solutions, personalized advice and in-depth data analysis cover a range of industries including energy, technology, manufacturing and construction, chemicals and materials, food and beverages . Etc

Our research studies help our clients make superior data-driven decisions, understand market forecasts, take advantage of future opportunities and maximize efficiency by working as a partner to deliver accurate and valuable insights without compromise.

Having served over 5000 clients, we have provided reliable market research services to over 100 Global Fortune 500 companies such as Amazon, Dell, IBM, Shell, Exxon Mobil, General Electric, Siemens, Microsoft, Sony and Hitachi.

Contact us:
Mr. Edwyne Fernandes
USA: +1 (650)-781-4080
UK: +44 (753)-715-0008
APAC: +61 (488)-85-9400
US toll free: +1 (800)-782-1768

Website: –https://www.marketresearchintellect.com/

Live News: Boeing to relocate headquarters to DC area from Chicago

0

Wall Street’s Nasdaq Composite fell 5% on Thursday in its biggest drop since the market tumult of 2020, marking a sharp reversal from a powerful rally in the previous trading session.

The drop put the index, where many of the top U.S. tech companies are listed, on track for its biggest one-day drop since September 2020.

The blue-chip S&P 500 index also suffered heavy selling, slipping almost 4%. All major sectors were in the red, with economically sensitive industries including consumer discretionary, technology and financial companies among the biggest losers.

US government bonds also came under intense selling pressure, pushing the 10-year Treasury yield up 0.18 percentage points to 3.1%.

The sharp reversal after a strong performance in US stocks and Treasuries in the previous session comes as major central banks withdraw crisis stimulus at a time of growing concerns over global economic growth.

The Federal Reserve, the world’s most influential central bank, raised its main interest rate by 0.5 percentage points on Wednesday, its biggest increase since 2000, as it tries to tame intense inflation. Fed chief Jay Powell has sent a strong signal that the bank should raise rates by the same amount at its next two meetings.

However, in a sign of the headwinds facing global economies, the Bank of England warned on Thursday that the UK will slide into recession this year, with rising energy prices pushing inflation above 10 %.

Learn more about today’s market movements here.

Reporting by Adam Samson, Naomi Rovnick, George Steer and Ian Johnston in London, Eric Platt in New York and Hudson Lockett in Hong Kong

With deficit falling, Biden highlights fiscal responsibility

body of the story

WASHINGTON (AP) — President Joe Biden plans to emphasize deficit reduction in his remarks Wednesday at the White House, noting that the government will pay down the national debt this quarter for the first time in six years.

Biden will highlight how the big job gains have boosted total revenue and led to additional tax revenue that has improved the government’s balance sheet, said a White House official who previewed the speech on condition of anonymity.

In addition to the quarterly national debt reduction, the Treasury Department estimates that the budget deficit this fiscal year will shrink by $1.5 trillion. This decrease marks an improvement over initial forecasts and would likely put the annual deficit below $1.3 trillion.

The Democratic president has again focused on deficit reduction ahead of the midterm elections, with administration officials saying the $1.9 trillion coronavirus relief blast approved in 2021 has already paid off in the form of faster growth which is now helping stabilize government finances.

Deficit reduction is also a priority of Sen. Joe Manchin of West Virginia, the key Democratic vote in the equally divided Senate that blocked passage of Biden’s national and environmental agenda in December. The reduction also comes amid rising interest rates on US Treasuries, a result of inflation at a 40-year high and efforts by the Federal Reserve to reduce price pressures.

It’s unclear whether greater fiscal responsibility can bring Biden politically as Democrats try to defend control of Congress. His two most recent Democratic predecessors, Bill Clinton and Barack Obama, also cut budget deficits, only to leave office and see their Republican successors use the savings from tax cuts.

Yet Biden hopes to draw a stark contrast to former President Donald Trump, whom he defeated in 2020. Trump, among a host of promises, pledged to reduce the national debt but failed to do so in during any financial quarter of his presidency. Biden has repeatedly taken aim at this broken promise.

Earlier this week, the Treasury said it planned to pay down $26 billion in private debt from April to June this year. However, hopes of debt reduction could be dampened by the Treasury’s expectation to borrow $182 billion in private debt from July to September.

When unveiling his budget plan in March, Biden said that after his Republican predecessor’s “fiscal mismanagement” his administration is “cutting Trump’s deficits and getting our fiscal house in order.”

One of the challenges for Biden is that voters have largely ignored deficit increases and rarely rewarded deficit cuts. Voters might debate the idea of ​​cutting deficits with pollsters, but health care, incomes and inflation are often tops when they vote.

Norman Ornstein, senior scholar at the conservative American Enterprise Institute, noted that deficits are often “abstract” to voters. Recent low interest rates have also eased any potential economic drag from higher deficits, which have risen following the COVID-19 pandemic and, separately, the 2008 financial crisis, to help the economy. to straighten up.

“They’re more likely to react to things that are in their wheelhouse or that they think will have a more direct effect on their lives,” Ornstein said. Deficits are “a step removed for most voters, and we’ve been through periods where we’ve had big deficits and debts and it’s not like it’s directly devastated people’s lives.”

With deficit falling, Biden highlights fiscal responsibility | Economic news

By JOSH BOAK and FATIMA HUSSEIN, Associated Press

WASHINGTON (AP) — President Joe Biden plans to emphasize deficit reduction in his remarks Wednesday at the White House, noting that the government will pay down the national debt this quarter for the first time in six years.

Biden will highlight how the big job gains have boosted total revenue and led to additional tax revenue that has improved the government’s balance sheet, said a White House official who previewed the speech on condition of anonymity.

In addition to the quarterly national debt reduction, the Treasury Department estimates that the budget deficit this fiscal year will shrink by $1.5 trillion. This decrease marks an improvement over initial forecasts and would likely put the annual deficit below $1.3 trillion.

The Democratic president has again focused on deficit reduction ahead of the midterm elections, with administration officials saying the $1.9 trillion coronavirus relief blast approved in 2021 has already paid off in the form of faster growth which is now helping stabilize government finances.

political cartoons

Deficit reduction is also a priority of Sen. Joe Manchin of West Virginia, the key Democratic vote in the equally divided Senate that blocked passage of Biden’s national and environmental agenda in December. The reduction also comes amid rising interest rates on US Treasuries, a result of inflation at a 40-year high and efforts by the Federal Reserve to reduce price pressures.

It’s unclear whether greater fiscal responsibility can bring Biden politically as Democrats try to defend control of Congress. His two most recent Democratic predecessors, Bill Clinton and Barack Obama, also cut budget deficits, only to leave office and see their Republican successors use the savings from tax cuts.

Yet Biden hopes to draw a stark contrast to former President Donald Trump, whom he defeated in 2020. Trump, among a host of promises, pledged to reduce the national debt but failed to do so in during any financial quarter of his presidency. Biden has repeatedly taken aim at this broken promise.

Earlier this week, the Treasury said it planned to pay down $26 billion in private debt from April to June this year. However, hope for debt reduction could be dampened by the Treasury’s expectation to borrow $182 billion in private debt from July to September.

When unveiling his budget plan in March, Biden said that after his Republican predecessor’s “fiscal mismanagement” his administration is “cutting Trump’s deficits and getting our fiscal house in order.”

One of the challenges for Biden is that voters have largely ignored deficit increases and rarely rewarded deficit cuts. Voters might debate the idea of ​​cutting deficits with pollsters, but health care, incomes and inflation are often tops when they vote.

Norman Ornstein, senior scholar at the conservative American Enterprise Institute, noted that deficits are often “abstract” to voters. Recent low interest rates have also eased any potential economic drag from higher deficits, which have risen following the COVID-19 pandemic and, separately, the 2008 financial crisis, to help the economy. to straighten up.

“They’re more likely to react to things that are in their wheelhouse or that they think will have a more direct effect on their lives,” Ornstein said. Deficits are “a cut-out stage for most voters, and we’ve been through periods where we’ve had big deficits and debts and it’s not like it’s directly devastated people’s lives.”

Copyright 2022 The Associated Press. All rights reserved. This material may not be published, broadcast, rewritten or redistributed.

Biden lays out deficit progress in bid to counter criticism

WASHINGTON (AP) — President Joe Biden on Wednesday highlighted new numbers showing the government’s red ink will rise less than expected this year and the national debt will decline this quarter as he tried to counter criticism of his economic leadership amid growing dismay over inflation. midterm elections that will decide control of Congress.

Biden, embracing deficit reduction as a way to fight inflation, stressed the national debt cut would be the first in six years, an achievement that eluded former President Donald Trump despite his promises to improve the federal balance sheet.

“Ultimately, the deficit grew every year under my predecessor before the pandemic and during the pandemic. It’s been down the two years since I’ve been here,” Biden said. “Why is it important? Because cutting the deficit is a way to ease inflationary pressures.

The president is putting a renewed emphasis on cutting the deficit — which is the gap between what the nation spends and what it takes in — to blunt Republican criticism that the 1.9 coronavirus relief package trillion dollars has worsened the situation of the American economy. It’s an attempt to restore his image as a responsible manager of the economy while trying to fend off criticism of inflation at its highest level in 40 years. The reopening of the economy in the wake of the coronavirus pandemic and the shortage of raw materials resulting from the Russian-Ukrainian war have made high prices a key political risk for Democrats.

But it’s unclear whether greater fiscal responsibility can bring Biden politically as Democrats try to defend their control of the House and Senate. His two most recent Democratic predecessors, Bill Clinton and Barack Obama, also cut budget deficits, only to leave office and see their Republican successors use the savings from tax cuts.

When reporters tried to ask Biden about other topics after his remarks, the president pushed, “You don’t want to ask about deficits?”

Sen. Joe Manchin, DW.Va., says inflation will be the determining factor for midterm reviews. (Source: CNN/Pool)

Bidden makes a nuanced argument about how the fiscal outlook has improved: Strong job creation over the past 16 months has boosted total incomes and led to additional tax revenue. This means that the budget deficit this fiscal year will shrink by $1.5 trillion, much better than the $1.3 trillion originally projected. The reduction in public borrowing will in turn limit the financial sources of inflation.

But the expected $26 billion drop this quarter in the national debt — which is money the United States owes due to deficits accumulated over time — will be short-lived, as the debt already stands at 23.9 trillion dollars and will continue to increase in the second half of this year. And while Biden expects his plans to improve the outlook for budget deficits over the next decade, the national debt would continue to climb. The Biden administration believes the cost of servicing debt is low enough to sustain borrowing, while critics say structural changes are needed to improve long-term prospects.

“There needs to be real budget restructuring because we keep seeing these trillion-dollar deficits as far as the eye can see,” said Douglas Holtz-Eakin, former director of the Congressional Budget Office who now leads America’s center-right. Equity Forum.

Holtz-Eakin said the Biden administration takes credit for declining deficits over the past two years, which largely happened due to the end of coronavirus-related spending, rather than fixing finances Medicare and Social Security that will determine the long-term fiscal outlook. .

“That doesn’t seem like the right aspiration for a great country,” Holtz-Eakin said. “What they’re doing is basically deferring the need to do anything real and actually fix the programs that are important to people.”

Deficit reduction is also a priority of Sen. Joe Manchin of West Virginia, the key Democratic vote in the equally divided Senate that blocked passage of Biden’s national and environmental agenda in December. The reduction also comes amid rising interest rates on US Treasuries, driven by 8.5% inflation and efforts by the Federal Reserve to reduce price pressures.

Less than an hour after Biden’s remarks, Senate Republicans gathered to challenge Biden’s economic policies. Their main criticism is that overspending in response to COVID-19 has been associated with restrictions on domestic oil and natural gas production, resulting in higher gasoline prices than under Trump.

“The biggest drag on the US economy right now involves rising energy costs,” said Sen. Dan Sullivan, R-Alaska. “This is purely a self-inflicted wound by the Biden administration.”

One of the challenges for Biden is that voters have largely ignored deficit increases and rarely rewarded deficit cuts. Voters might debate the idea of ​​cutting deficits with pollsters, but health care, incomes and inflation are often tops when they vote.

Norman Ornstein, senior scholar at the conservative American Enterprise Institute, noted that deficits are often “abstract” to voters. Recent low interest rates have also eased any potential economic drag from higher deficits, which have risen following the COVID-19 pandemic and, separately, the 2008 financial crisis, to help the economy. to straighten up.

“They’re more likely to react to things that are in their wheelhouse or that they think will have a more direct effect on their lives,” Ornstein said. Deficits are “a cut-out stage for most voters, and we’ve been through periods where we’ve had big deficits and debts and it’s not like it’s directly devastated people’s lives.”

Copyright 2022 The Associated Press. All rights reserved.

Hydraulic Reservoir Market – Size, Share, Growth Factor, Trends and Forecast 2028, – Standard Technologies, Products Buyers, Northern Tool, American Mobile Power

0

Hydraulic Reservoir Market Overview

This has led to several changes in This report also covers the impact of COVID-19 on the global market.

The rising technology in Hydraulic Reservoirs Market is also described in this research report. The factors which are driving the growth of the market and giving positive impetus to thrive in the global market are explained in detail. The study examines the current data center energy market scenario and its market dynamics for the period 2022-2028. It covers a detailed overview of several market growth catalysts, restraints, and trends. The report presents both the demand and supply sides of the market. It profiles and reviews the leading companies and other eminent ones operating in the market.

Get Sample PDF Copy of Report @ https://www.reportsinsights.com/sample/643673

Leading competitors in the Global Hydraulic Reservoirs Market are: Products Buyers, American Mobile Power, Standard Technologies, Northern Tool, Lovejoy, Moonlight Manufacturers, Asha Metal IndustrIes, Drive Products, Hesco Of Virginia, ARGO-HYTOS

The historical data available in the report details the development of Hydraulic Reservoir at national, regional and international levels. The research report on Hydraulic Reservoirs Market presents a detailed analysis based on in-depth research of the overall market, especially on questions relating to the market size, growth scenario, potential opportunities, operations landscape, trend analysis and competitive analysis.

The main types of products covered are:
Open the hydraulic oil tank
Closed hydraulic oil tank

The application coverage in the market is:
Passenger vehicles
Commercial vehicles

Scope of Hydraulic Tanks Market:

ATTRIBUTES DETAILS
YEAR OF REFERENCE 2021
FORECAST YEAR 2022-2028
UNITY Value (million USD/billion)
CAGR Yes (%)
SECTORS COVERED Key Players, Types, Applications, End Users etc.
REPORT COVER Total Revenue Forecast, Company Ranking & Market Share, Regional Competitive Landscape, Growth Factors, Emerging Trends, Business Strategies, etc.
REGIONAL ANALYSIS North America, Europe, Asia-Pacific, Latin America, Middle East and Africa

This Global Hydraulic Reservoir Market research report sheds light on crucial trends and dynamics impacting the development of the market including restraints, drivers, and opportunity.

To obtain this report at a favorable rate. : https://www.reportsinsights.com/discount/643673

The fundamental objective of the Hydraulic Tanks market report is to provide correct and strategic analysis of the Hydraulic Tanks industry. The report examines each segment and sub-segments presents before you a 360 degree view of said market.

Market scenario:

The report further highlights development trends of the global Hydraulic Reservoirs market. Factors driving the growth of the market and fueling its segments are also analyzed in the report. The report also highlights its applications, types, deployments, components, developments in this market.

Hhighlights the following key factors:

:- activity Descrition A detailed description of the company’s operations and business divisions.
:- Business strategy – Synthesis of the analyst on the commercial strategy of the company.
:- SWOT analysis – A detailed analysis of the company’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats.
:- Company History – Progression of key events associated with the business.
:- Main products and services – A list of the company’s main products, services and brands.
:- Key Competitors – A list of the company’s main competitors.
:- Important sites and subsidiaries – A list and contact details of the main sites and subsidiaries of the company.
:- Detailed financial ratios for the last five years – The latest financial ratios derived from the annual financial statements published by the company with 5 years of history.

Oour report offers:

Market share assessments for regional and country segments.
– Analysis of the market shares of the main players in the industry.
– Strategic recommendations for new entrants.
– Market forecasts for a minimum of 9 years of all mentioned segments, sub-segments and regional markets.
– Market trends (drivers, restraints, opportunities, threats, challenges, investment opportunities and recommendations).
– Strategic recommendations in key business segments based on market estimates.
– Competitive landscaping mapping major common trends.
– Company profiling with detailed strategies, financials and recent developments.
– Supply chain trends mapping the latest technological advancements.

Access full report description, table of contents, table of figure, chart, etc. @ https://www.reportsinsights.com/industry-forecast/hydraulic-tank-market-analysis-by-regions-643673

About Us:

Reports Insights is the research industry leader providing contextual, data-centric research services to clients worldwide. The firm assists its clients in developing business policies and achieving sustainable growth in their respective market area. The industry provides consulting services, syndicated research reports, and custom research reports.

Contact us:

E-mail: [email protected]

Sales: [email protected]

Fed meets to launch new salvo against record US inflation

Published on: Amended:

Washington (AFP) – The U.S. central bank opened its policy meeting on Tuesday, which is expected to produce a sharp rate hike as policymakers grapple with record inflation.

After a quarter-point hike in the benchmark policy rate in March, Federal Reserve Chairman Jerome Powell and other central bankers said a half-point hike could be announced at the end of March. the two-day meeting on Wednesday.

The challenge for the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) is to rein in price pressures without tipping the world’s largest economy into recession.

The Fed is “behind the inflation curve and ready to act aggressively,” Grant Thornton’s Diane Swonk said in an analysis.

Consumer prices rose 8.5% in March from a year earlier, the highest level in more than 40 years, and although the economy has recovered strongly from the pandemic, growth has slowed. contracted by 1.4% during the first three months of the year.

A second quarter of negative growth would constitute a recession.

Analysts say it’s hard to avoid a slowdown during an aggressive tightening cycle, especially as price increases are partly driven by factors beyond the Fed’s control, such as the war in Ukraine. and the Covid-19 shutdowns in China.

Nor can the Fed influence the number of workers available in the U.S. labor market to ease hiring problems that have driven up wages, fueling fears of a potential price-wage spiral.

“Many within the Fed have expressed skepticism about achieving a soft landing at this late stage in the game. Even Powell said the landing could be ‘soft’ instead of ‘soft,'” said Swonk.

Powell acknowledged that the central bank would act quickly and make early rate hikes, including multiple half-point hikes, if needed.

At this meeting, the FOMC is also set to begin the process of removing its massive holdings of bonds accumulated during the pandemic as the institution sought to maintain credit in the economy.

It could also disrupt financial markets and dampen activity.

Kathy Bostjancic of Oxford Economics expects another half-point rise in June and forecasts the lending rate to end the year at 2.13% and then rise to 2.63% by mid -2023.

“We are looking for the combination of slowing aggregate demand and some easing of supply chain strains in 2023 to ease inflationary pressures,” she said in an analysis.

“Labour force participation should continue to recover, helping to temper wage growth.”

At the moment, signals point to “a relatively low but growing probability of a recession over the next 12 months”, but Bostjancic warned that the odds would increase if the factors driving inflation worsen.

State sues Paz Dominguez and Humboldt County for failure to comply with reporting requirements | Lost Coast Outpost


###

The State of California is suing Humboldt County and Auditor-Comptroller Karen Paz Dominguez, personally and professionally, for failing to comply with government-mandated financial reporting requirements.

A nine-page complaint filed Monday by Supervising Deputy Attorney General Julianne Mossler alleges that Paz Dominguez failed to file the county’s enacted budgets on time for two consecutive fiscal years — 2020/2021 and 2021/2022 — and failed to no longer filed county financial transaction reports for fiscal years 2019/2020 and 2020/2021 “in the time, form, and manner prescribed by the state comptroller.”

The state is asking the court to order Paz Dominguez to pay $10,000 – two fines of $5,000 each – and to order the county to pay $2,000 for these delayed and/or improperly submitted reports. The lawsuit also asks the court to issue a warrant requiring Paz Dominguez to “perform his mandatory statutory duties” and properly submit overdue reports.

News of the trial came as a surprise to Paz Dominguez, who told the Outpost by email on Monday afternoon that she was unaware and had not received a copy.

“I have no comment on a lawsuit as I have no documents to reference,” she wrote. “I’ll have to check with the CAD [County Administrative Office] regarding the submission of budgets as this is something that the CAO has historically submitted to the SCO [State Controller’s Office] on behalf of the county,” she added.

The state’s lawsuit, however, says it is Paz Dominguez’s responsibility as the county’s auditor-comptroller to file both the county’s enacted budgets and its financial transaction reports.

“The defendant Paz Dominguez is sued in his personal capacity and in his official capacity as auditor-controller for [the] County,” the suit reads. “She is an elected county official, is responsible for the county’s financial records, and is responsible under governmental code sections 29093 and 53891, et seq., for ensuring that the budgets passed by the county and its RTFs are filed within the time, form and manner required by the State Comptroller.

The lawsuit then recounts a succession of missed deadlines, incomplete or incorrectly submitted reports and long failures in the communication of the Office of the Auditor-Comptroller.

For example, the state comptroller’s office sent letters to Paz Dominguez on February 28 informing him that the county’s enacted budget for 2020/2021 had not been received by the December 1, 2020 due date, and that the budget for the following year had not been received by December. 1st 2021, due date, according to the trial. The letters warned that the county would be subject to forfeiture of $1,000 for each of these two “missing” budgets if Paz Dominguez did not file them by March 21.

The state received the budget schedules by that due date, but they were incomplete, according to the lawsuit. “Both sets of schedules lacked the information required by the government code…” the lawsuit says. Budgets did not have opening fund balances and sources of funds did not equal uses of funds, so the state comptroller “discarded incomplete schedules” and has yet to receive the correct versions, according to the complaint.

This is the primary cause of action for the state. The second relates to the county’s overdue 2019/2020 Financial Transactions Report, which has been the subject of argument and speculation at recent meetings of the Board of Supervisors. Financial transaction reports show all of a county’s financial transactions for the previous fiscal year.

According to the complaint, the state comptroller’s office first contacted Paz Dominguez about the overdue report on November 6, 2020, followed on February 26, 2021 by a warning that she would face a $5,000 fine. $ if it failed. submit the report by March 18, 2021.

She failed to submit it by the deadline, and on June 1 of last year, the State Comptroller’s Office followed up again.

“Paz Dominguez responded on June 14, 2021, stating that the county’s audit for fiscal year 2019/2020 was in progress, but not yet complete,” the lawsuit states. “Paz Dominguez offered to complete the report using unverified information and indicated that it would take two weeks.” The state comptroller’s office agreed, but Paz Dominguez again missed the deadline.

Almost nine months later, on February 24 of this year, the attorney general’s office sent a final demand letter to Paz Dominguez, giving him 20 days to file the report.

At a March 1 supervisory board meeting, Paz Dominguez said she believed the final demand letter had been sent by mistake, or possibly through an automated process, as her office was working directly with a team from the state comptroller’s office, who had come to town to investigate the county’s financial practices and reports, and they knew nothing about the final request.

However, the attorney general’s office later confirmed that the notice was not sent in error.

According to the lawsuit, Paz Dominguez submitted the overdue financial transactions report on March 16 “and falsely stated that it was prepared by the ‘AG’ and ‘at the direction of the PG'”.

In response, the state comptroller’s office returned the report to Paz Dominguez with an email explaining that the report was deficient and asking him to submit an accurate first and last name and title of the report preparer no later than the close of business on March 23.

“Paz Dominguez did not respond to the SCO email and did not correct his FTR,” the complaint states. The report is now over a year late, and the state’s lawsuit claims that the submission of the “flawed” report “is inexcusable and does not satisfy Paz Dominguez’s legal obligation.” The government code states that she is subject to forfeiture of $5,000, according to the suit.

The county’s 2020/2021 Financial Transactions Report was also not submitted by the January 31 deadline, and on February 25, the State Comptroller’s Office sent Paz Dominguez another letter, the informing her that she was overdue and giving her 20 days to comply. He also warned that failure to submit it by March 17 will result in the forfeiture of another fine of up to $5,000.

“Paz Dominguez did not file her 2020/2021 FTR by the March 17, 2022 deadline, nor has she filed it since then,” the suit states.

In a third cause of action, the state asks the court to issue a warrant order “compelling Paz Dominguez to perform his mandatory statutory duties.”

the Outpost sent Paz Dominguez a copy of the lawsuit. She responded shortly after saying, “I will pass it on to my lawyer and communicate with the SCO. I will not give you any comment because it will be better handled in an official capacity.

You can read the full costume via the link below.

DOCUMENT: California State People and California State Comptroller Betty T. Yee v Karen Paz Dominguez and Humboldt County

###

PREVIOUSLY:

Insurance company refuses treatment for breast cancer patient

0

ATLANTA, Ga. (CBS46) – Cancer patients say their lives are stuck in limbo after Aetna, a major health insurance company, was accused of wrongfully denying claims for coverage for a “life-changing” treatment.

“You can’t even imagine how you’re going to handle something like that,” Claire Thevenot shook her head. “It’s just devastating.”

Thévenot considers herself a fighter. As a nurse and patient care advocate, most of the time she feels like she’s going to war for others. But today, she is fighting for herself.

“My first thought was that I was dying,” she recalled.

Stage IV breast cancer, already a medical battle, has also become a financial battle.

“Your health is in the hands of someone who really has no idea what’s going on with you and my situation,” Thevenot said.

After a double mastectomy in 2018, the cancer returned about four months ago. This time, spots spread to his spine. She says her doctors named Stereotactic Body Radiation Therapy (SBRT) as her best chance for survival.

The technique sends a precise beam with high intense radiation doses to a specific cancerous location, according to UCLA Health. It is a targeted treatment.

Denial of insurance

“We cannot approve this request,” Thevenot read in his letter from Aetna. The company says on its website that around 39 million people depend on it.

Aetna declined insurance coverage for the FDA-approved treatment requested by her doctors. The patient believes that cost was the main factor.

“I asked my doctor to pay for this treatment out of pocket and he just said it was tens of thousands of dollars.” Thevenot, adding that “it wouldn’t be something most people could afford to pay out of pocket.”

Despite medical studies showing that the success rate can be 80-90% in removing cancerous spots, according to UCLA Health, AETNA’s denial letter states that there is no current research indicating that his cancer specific responds to it better than other types of radiation. The letter goes on to say that his plan does not cover services that are not medically necessary.

“The most shocking part, I think, is who decides if it’s medically necessary. Common sense would tell you, it’s the doctors who decide. Representative Matt Wilson said that “medical professionals who have spent their entire career in medicine [should] get to decide.

Georgia State Representative, lawyer and health activist Matt Wilson says his clients, even his constituents, are too often denied coverage by employer-sponsored insurance.

“And in Georgia, by the way, half of everyone who has insurance gets it from their employer. From their job,” Wilson explained.

Systematic problem with federal trial sites

Insurance denial is far from a local or state problem. Surveys by CBS46 found nationwide that insurance denials have jumped 23% in the past five years and 11% just since the pandemic, data from the organization Change Healthcare has revealed. Defenders criticize insurers for systematically prioritizing patient benefits.

Some ways the alleged model could change would be through new federal regulations or lawsuits.

In a Florida class action lawsuit, cancer patients seeking similar targeted radiation therapy argued that Aetna wrongly denied coverage due to cost, ignored competent medical advice and was in pain. defined what was considered a medical necessity.

Aetna claims otherwise, denying all allegations. But, a judge has just ruled in favor of cancer patients.

“The court said” yes, we listened to the evidence in these particular cases [two] cases, we agree that Aetna violated its own policy by denying their cancer treatment,” Wilson described. “And, we think that may apply to a lot of other people.”

It took about two years for a judge to grant the petition in favor of the patients and it could take a lot longer for a potential payout, policy changes or even legal appeals. It is time that people like Thévenot perhaps did not have one.

“It’s absolutely time sensitive, that’s true. They literally make life or death decisions.

After being refused twice, Thevenot tried once more by writing a four-page letter. She cited additional studies and research to show why her life depended on the treatment. Aetna eventually granted him the insurance coverage. The mom completed her targeted radiation therapy several weeks ago.

Meanwhile, the class action is still in its early stages. Aetna should appeal.

If there’s anything you’d like CBS46 to investigate, complete this submission form.

BL Explainer: Complicated fuel taxation and the controversy surrounding it

0

With international crude oil prices rising from the last quarter of 2021, pressure has begun to mount on the Center to reduce fuel taxes and provide relief to consumers.

How complicated is fuel taxation in India?

It’s quite complicated. The final retail price of gasoline and diesel that you buy at the gas pump has several components. The base price of gasoline, including freight, represents 56% of the final sale price of gasoline and 60% of diesel.

The Center collects excise duties on the base price, which represent 26% and 23% of the final price of petrol and diesel respectively. Excise duty is charged at a fixed rate per liter and has various components (see below). The trader’s commission amounts to an additional 4 and 3% of the selling price of the two petroleum products.

States levy a Value Added Tax (VAT) on the cost of gasoline and diesel, including excise duties and dealer’s commission. From now on, the States have carte blanche to structure and tax fuel on their territory. Many states/UTs such as Arunachal Pradesh, Delhi, Odisha and Telangana only charge VAT at a certain rate applied on the cost of petrol. Since VAT is an ad valorem tax, it will rise and fall with the market price of fuel.

Many states have attempted to address the resulting volatility in tax collection by adopting a hybrid model in which they charge a lower VAT on fuel and also apply a flat charge per liter of gasoline and diesel. Tamil Nadu, Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh and so on have this hybrid model of fuel taxation. Other states and UT apply other innovative charges, including highway development tax, employment tax, pollution surcharge, and more.

What is the recent row over the Prime Minister’s remarks on fuel taxes?

With international crude oil prices rising from the last quarter of 2021, pressure has begun to build on the Center to reduce fuel taxes to calm inflation and provide relief to consumers.

The Center reduced central excise duty by ₹5 on petrol and ₹10 on diesel last November. He also called on states and union territories to follow suit by reducing their taxes. Many states have complied with the dictate of the Center.

Uttar Pradesh, Gujarat, Karnataka, Haryana, Madhya Pradesh and Goa have reduced state fuel tax by ₹7 per litre. Punjab achieved the largest reduction, reducing petrol tax by ₹10 and diesel tax by ₹5 per litre.

Many states such as Bihar (₹3.2), Himachal Pradesh (₹2) and Odisha (₹3) made small superficial cuts. The Prime Minister is now chastising opposition-led states for failing to cut fuel taxes.

Why are opposition-led states unhappy with the PM’s remark?

The Prime Minister specifically singled out Maharashtra, West Bengal, Telangana, Andhra Pradesh, Tamil Nadu, Kerala and Jharkhand, saying their reluctance to cut taxes is weighing on consumers.

The states stress that the Center must forfeit its revenue by further reducing its fuel taxes before asking them. They are also not happy with the way the Center is using the fuel tax levy and surcharge to keep more of the taxes with it.

They also believe the Center is being unfair in asking them to forego income from an important source at a time when the economy is still struggling with the effects of the pandemic. Fuel and alcohol taxes make up a significant portion of states’ own tax revenue.

Why do States Against the Center levy a tax on fuel?

Cess is a tax levied on basic tax and it is levied for a particular purpose, such as education tax, infrastructure development tax, etc.

More importantly, since the tax collected must be spent for a specific purpose only, the Center does not need to share the tax collected with the states.

However, if we consider the excise duty levied by the Centre, it is made up of four elements: the basic excise duty, the special excise duty, the additional excise duty (road cost and infrastructure) and excise duty for agriculture and infrastructure development. The Center only needs to share with the states the amount collected as the basic excise duty since the other elements are either taxes or subject to a surtax.

Basic excise duties represent only 4.2% of the amount collected by the Center for fuel taxes. Once 41% of the base excise tax is shared with the states, the Center retains over 98% of the tax collected on gasoline and diesel. Opposition-ruled states are crying foul over the way the Center has structured fuel taxes, depriving them of their share.

Wouldn’t it be much easier to subject fuel to the GST?

This is the right way to go and it will help you in many ways. First, it will ensure that consumers across the country pay the same tax rate. Currently, petrol prices in Maharashtra are above ₹120 per liter while they are ₹15 lower in Delhi. Such disparity will cease once fuel moves under GST, as all states will be subject to similar taxes.

Second, the Center will have to give the states their fair share of taxes collected, as the complicated central tax structure will fall under the GST.

Third, fuel tax rates could drop once it becomes subject to the GST. The current gas and diesel tax rate (Central and States combined) is 75%, well above the higher GST bracket applied to sin property.

Published on

May 02, 2022

Opinion: Suncor’s safety record has helped make it a target for activist investors

Suncor Box. The McMurray oil sands plant releases steam on September 11, 2001.Jeff McIntosh/The Globe and Mail

Suncor Energy Inc.’s SU-T Board of Directors makes it easy for activist Elliott Investment Management LP to gain support for a shakeup at one of Canada’s largest energy companies.

Ahead of last year’s annual meeting, the Calgary-based oil and gas producer was told that institutional investors were unhappy with weak operating performance relative to its peers, including the poor balance sheet of Suncor security.

After three workplace fatalities at Suncor’s Alberta operations in December 2020 and January 2021, Britain’s largest pensions manager has gone out of its way to explain why it voted against board decisions on executive compensation.

Ahead of Suncor’s 2020 annual meeting last May, Royal London Asset Management, which is investing a total of £159 billion for its customers and owns three million shares of Suncor, said: “Given the deaths in the business, we have concerns about the discretionary adjustment of awards based on safety performance.”

US hedge fund calls for overhaul of Suncor Energy

Suncor directors awarded Suncor CEO Mark Little a total of $10.1 million in 2020.

This month of January, another worker died in a truck accident at Suncor. The company’s accident rate increased compared to the previous year. Suncor’s operating and market performance continued to lag competitors such as Canadian Natural Resources Ltd., Cenovus Energy Inc. and Imperial Oil Ltd.

The board said the right things. In the proxy statement explaining the 2021 executive compensation logic, the directors said, “Safety is, and always has been, a core value for Suncor. The directors also said: “We have suffered some operating setbacks and recognize that we need to do better.”

However, Suncor’s board increased executive compensation. This year, Mr. Little’s package includes a cash bonus of $1.96 million, or 127% of his target payout. In other words, the board reported that the CEO exceeded expectations. Mr. Little won a total of $11.8 million.

Enter Elliott, with four decades of experience combining exhaustive research with bare-knuckle tactics to revise boards and define new strategies at blue-chip companies like AT&T Inc. and Marathon Petroleum Corp. .

After building a 3.4% stake in Suncor, worth more than $2 billion, Elliott launched a campaign last week to appoint five new directors to Suncor’s 10-member board.

“Due to operational and safety issues, Suncor’s old premium valuation has given way to a steep discount,” Elliott said in a 45-slide presentation that detailed plans for each arm of the company. In every industry – from oil and forestry to automotive and construction – there is a direct link between worker safety and financial performance. To make sure that’s the case at one of the nation’s leading energy companies, Elliott said, “Suncor needs to properly factor safety into executive compensation metrics.”

With new directors in place, the fund manager wants to see Suncor overhaul management, improve the performance of its oil sands properties, return more cash to shareholders and potentially sell its 1 800 branches, which analysts estimate to be worth. around $10 billion.

Elliott requires a rigor that Suncor’s board of directors has not, to date, demonstrated. This message resonates with institutional investors.

Suncor’s share price, which has underperformed its peers since 2020, soared on news of the activist’s arrival. Stock traders last week said long-term investors in Suncor were holding onto their shares, anticipating Elliott would succeed in improving performance, while hedge funds piled in, planning to follow in the activist’s footsteps. .

Trevor Wood, energy analyst at National Bank Financial, spoke on behalf of many of Suncor’s institutional shareholders on Friday when he said in a report: “We agree that change is needed and are indifferent to the measures taken to generate better execution.”

What happens afterwards? Last week, Suncor said its board and management would meet with Elliott “in due course”. The company has hired proxy contestants Kingsdale Advisors to help manage the activist’s campaign. Mr. Little and the board are expected to present their strategy at Suncor’s annual meeting scheduled for May 10.

Will Elliott’s campaign to renew Suncor’s board succeed? Consider what happened in 2011, when activist investor Bill Ackman’s Pershing Square Capital Management traveled to Calgary, pushing for a revamped board and a new CEO at flagship Canadian Pacific Railway. ltd.

In the months that followed, Pershing Square’s plans won support from institutional investors at CP Rail – a show of support that surprised the railway’s administrators. CP Rail’s share price then soared; the militant campaign is considered an outstanding success for investors.

Suncor’s ongoing safety and operational issues, and its resulting weak valuation, leave its board vulnerable to the same revolution that reshaped CP Rail.

Your time is valuable. Receive the Top Business Headlines newsletter in your inbox morning or evening. register today.

Most Influential Women in Banking: Upcoming 2022

As we emerge from a global pandemic crisis that has wreaked havoc on many people’s professional and personal lives, it’s no surprise that a recurring theme among this year’s nominees is empathy.

Four of the 15 Most Powerful Women in Banking: The following list noted the valuing of empathy as a leadership quality. “Compassion, or as I like to say, empathy for action, is the most important quality a leader should have,” said Caroline Donlin, Managing Director and Group Head, BMO Harris Corporate Advisory.

Emily Turner, managing director and head of business development for the Institutional Clients Group at Citi, cited her boss’s view on empathy and leadership. “Our CEO, Jane Fraser, spoke about how leading with empathy is a competitive advantage, and I agree. I believe that as we strive for excellence, we need to apply strong emotional intelligence to understand the challenges of our clients, as well as to develop and support our talents,” said Turner.

In a year when we celebrate the 20th anniversary of American Banker’s Most Powerful Women in Banking, it’s also remarkable that this year’s Next list shows how far many women have come. Four of this year’s nominees started at entry-level positions in banking and worked their way up. Tonya Calix, senior vice president of human resources and diversity at Beach Bank, started as an executive assistant. Beth Fite, director of retail banking at First Carolina Bank, started as a teller at a local bank before being hired as a private banker. Sonia Fraher started as an intern at Ally Financial’s predecessor, GMAC Bank, and is now senior director of products and strategy at the bank. And Laura Howe, a regional banking manager at Wells Fargo who now oversees branch operations in five states, got her start at the bank’s call center.

Among their many accomplishments, one of our honorees is one of the youngest CFOs in the industry; another is a former professional flautist; and another started a nonprofit to encourage Cleveland-area minority youth to consider careers in tech.

Read on to learn more about these talented rising stars and join us in celebrating their accomplishments.

‘It’s the only thing I see’ – Micah Richards names factor that could ‘hinder’ Man City in title race against Liverpool

0

Micah Richards fears a Champions League exit could ‘destroy the confidence’ of Manchester City ahead of the final games of the Premier League campaign.

The current champions returned to the top with an emphatic 4-0 victory over Leeds United in the late kick-off on Saturday, an important response after Liverpool beat Newcastle 1-0 earlier in the day. Another test awaits Pep Guardiola’s side on Wednesday night as they seek to reach a second consecutive European Cup final.

They take a 4-3 lead in the second leg of their semi-final with Real Madrid, but with the game at the Bernabeu, the La Liga side will be hoping to close the deficit. Liverpool will also travel to Spain in midweek for the second leg of their draw, as they hold a 2-0 lead over Villarreal.

READ MORE: What Jurgen Klopp didn’t need to do full-time as Liverpool send Man City recall

READ MORE: ‘They know’ – Gary Neville spots Man City bench reaction to second goal v Leeds

A former City player, now a pundit, Richards expects both sides to win their remaining league fixtures but warns defeat to Madrid on Wednesday could hamper City in the final weeks of the season.

He told Sky Sports after the match: ” You would prefer to have the points on the board, of course. But we saw it today, sometimes it can stimulate you. You never know, the Premier League is so unpredictable. Both teams will win all of their remaining matches.

“Liverpool, with their strength in depth. There could be a mistake. Liverpool winning today and City today, I think they will win them all.

“You don’t want to see Bayern Munich win 10 times in a row. You don’t want that in the Premier League. The only thing is if Man City were to go out in the Champions League it could shake confidence.

“It knocks you out. It’s the only thing I see getting in the way of City. The standards City and Liverpool are now setting. In my opinion, two of the best teams the Premier League has ever seen.”

Liverpool return to the Premier League next Saturday as they host Tottenham Hotspur at Anfield, while City host Newcastle United at the Etihad the following day.

Single-parent families ‘most exposed’ to Britain’s cost of living crisis | Cost of living crisis

0

Single-parent households are among the most exposed to the cost of living crisis, with a savings pot 20 times lower than the UK average, according to an analysis.

Labour’s analysis, using figures from the Office for National Statistics representing wealth in Britainshows that single parents with dependent children had £400 in savings between April 2018 and March 2020, compared to £8,000 for all households.

The cost of living has weighed on households across the UK, with 90% reporting an increase in their cost of living affected by rising fuel and food prices.

Single parents with dependent children had the lowest average net worth of any group, followed by single parents with non-dependent children, at £1,700.

By contrast, households where the couple are both over statutory retirement age and have no children have the highest amount of savings, at £59,600.

The analysis also reveals how the financial burden caused by lack of savings disproportionately affects women, given that women represent 90% of single-parent families.

The findings come after Cabinet ministers were urged to find ‘non-fiscal’ ways to tackle the cost of living crisis on Monday, with Dominic Raab subsequently coming under pressure when asked about the inability of the government to introduce policies to combat the crisis.

Labor has called for the presentation of an emergency budget, with policies that would include a windfall tax, a cut on business tariffs and a National Crime Agency investigation into taxpayers’ money lost to cause of the fraud.

Anneliese Dodds, Shadow MP for Women and Equality, said: ‘As payslips land on doormats across the country today, families are finding out just how much the Tories are pulling out of their pockets by increasing national insurance.

“With a pot of savings 20 times smaller than that of the average UK household entering the cost of living crisis, single parents will feel the pain more than most.

“Conservatives think it’s ‘dumb’ to do more to help families with skyrocketing bills. Labor is demanding an emergency budget to adopt sensible, costed and practical measures to help households, including a cut in energy bills of up to £600 paid for through a windfall tax on oil and gas companies.

Victoria Benson, chief executive of Gingerbread, a charity that supports single parent families, said saving was a “distant dream” for many single parents.

She added: “I have heard heartbreaking stories of mums going without food to be able to feed their children and of people being pushed into poverty because, despite working as many hours as possible, they don’t cannot cover basic living expenses.

“Single-parent families have very little financial flexibility, and while other families may be able to cut luxuries from their budget, single parents have to go without essentials like food and heating.”

Joeli Brearley, the founder of Pregnant Then Screwed, said: “We know that single parents have been disproportionately affected by the pandemic, especially when schools have closed and they have been unable to rely on a partner. to do all the extra unpaid work.

“Many have been forced out of their jobs or taken a pay cut through no fault of their own. Directly from this crisis they are now plunged into a new crisis as bills rise dramatically without warning, but the majority are already living hand to mouth.

Sign up for First Edition, our free daily newsletter – every weekday morning at 7am BST

“We know that sky-high childcare costs create not only a cost of living crisis, but also a labor cost crisis, especially for single parents.

“Our recent survey of 27,000 parents found that three-quarters – 73% – of single parents say childcare costs the same or more than their rent or mortgage, making more than half – 53% – of single parents say they have to skip meals or give up heating and fuel to pay for childcare.

“At this point, we have to wonder what the government really means when it talks about investing in hard working families, because single parents, who personify that, are clearly being ignored by this government.”

DeFi Growth Continues to Record New Highs as Metax CEO Sees Huge Market Opportunity for His New MTX Exchange

0

While the first quarter of 2022 was a tough quarter for nearly all risk assets, decentralized finance (DeFi) remained resilient throughout the volatility. Although Total Value Locked (TVL), which is the face value of crypto assets deposited under defined DeFi protocols, has lost around a third of its value at its January low, the asset class is approaching again. new heights. Metax Holdings Ltd. CEO Miro Kolesar sat down with us to discuss the macro market and how his business is doing in these boom times.

Metax Group Limited, which is an international financial conglomerate with a mission of financial innovation, has focused on technology financing, business expansion and global digital asset allocation. The CEO said: “We are committed to providing users with a complete, secure, efficient and free financial and ecological platform with exchanges, public chains, DAO, DeFi, wallets, quantitative funds, asset management digital and many other applications.”

In the modern DeFi space, the CEO of Metax is focused on designing a futuristic distributed financial infrastructure to connect and exchange value between different blockchain networks in a decentralized way. Miro Colesar, the CEO, strongly believes that the team can create a financial system that no longer relies on a centralized approach, with multiple types of assets moving freely through different chains.

MTX Exchange, which is Metax Group’s key product offering in the DeFi space, has been at the heart of the group’s ecosystem in its vision to enter the digital asset landscape, with two major licenses in the United States MSB, Cayman Islands. The exchange would generate revenue through contractual capital management documentaries, quantitative trading, and joint market capitalization.

The CEO said, “MTX Exchange will operate as a digital asset service that supports various settlements between parties and provides direct transactions between people. Institutions or individuals from different countries can buy, sell and exchange other digital currencies or legal currencies (such as US dollars or Euros).

MTX Exchange offers a trading interface like general stock trading, which has a K-line chart and technical analysis interface and can also suspend trading reservation orders. It is similar to the stock market operation method and easy to use.

The exchange will have several features which include:


Approaching the future with a robust, trustless and decentralized exchange

In the mission to build a secure, online, intelligent and decentralized inclusive digital financial services system to provide convenient, safe and reliable financial services to the global public, the future of MTX Exchange is full of challenges, but Miro Kolesar has full confidence and certainty in the ecosystem. After nearly 30 years of involvement in the financial landscape, he has long understood how the entire ecosystem and system works, not to mention that at the time of change, combining finance with blockchain technology which he has long sought.

Miro Kolesar insists on developing a scenario-based financial infrastructure with advanced technological capabilities, strengthening core competitiveness, and building a comprehensive MTX financial ecosystem. Combined with various financial products around the world to build an MTX trading platform, providing quality assurance for DeFi financial products through intelligent documentary and smart asset matching, and solving the pain points of difficulties in investment and returns for retail investors, so that everyone can benefit from financial services.

In the strategic context of diversified development, Miro Kolesar’s exploration of inclusive finance innovation has never ceased. Thanks to the team’s superior technical capabilities and level of risk control, as well as the attraction and control of high-quality targets, Miro Kolesar will continue to integrate financial ecology into application scenarios. with data capabilities and a technology cycle, empower partners and platforms, and build a new high place of value.

Media Contact
Company Name: Metax Group Limited
Contact person: james
E-mail: Send an email
Country: UK
Website: www.metaxgroup.net

Detained Immigrants Now Get Free Legal Aid in San Diego County – NBC 7 San Diego

San Diego County is now the first border region in the United States to offer free legal representation to immigrants, refugees and asylum seekers facing deportation.

“We declare with one voice that our justice system must be based on facts and laws, not on access to wealth and resources,” said County Supervisor Terra Lawson-Remer.

The Immigrant Advocacy Program, which was proposed by Lawson-Remer, was approved in May 2021. It took the county nearly a year to contract with organizations that will provide free legal aid to eligible immigrants.

The county has committed $5 million per year to fund the program. It was approved by a 3 to 2 vote among supervisors.

“To me, this is a federal matter and unfortunately not the fiscal responsibility of a local county government,” said Supervisor Jim Desmond, who voted against the plan.

At a press conference outside the County Administration Building on Thursday, immigration lawyers and advocates praised the historic program.

“Our program is established not to promote illegal immigration, but exactly the opposite. It is intended to promote the legal enforcement of our immigration laws and the rule of law within the four walls of all of our San Diego County courtrooms,” said Michael Garcia, Deputy Chief Public Defender and Director of the Office of Court-appointed Lawyers for San County. Diego.

Garcia said each case that goes through the system costs an average of $7,000, but costs can vary.

He added that in San Diego County, only 17% of people are represented by an attorney. He said that for those who have a lawyer, the success rate is 4%.

With a lawyer, detainees are up to 10 times more likely to get a waiver of deportation, according to immigration lawyer Andrew Nietor.

“That means not being deported, not being separated from his family, maybe not being sent back to a country where he faces persecution or death,” Nietor said.

The county has contracted with three immigration law organizations to provide services to detained immigrants: the American Bar Association Immigration Justice Project, Jewish Family Service, and the Southern California Immigration Project.

So far, lawyers say about 12 people have been accepted into the program.

That number is actually lower than expected, and Lawson-Remer says it’s possible the program will be available to other immigrant groups beyond those who are detained.

Lawyers say they will distribute flyers at detention centers to help publicize the availability of free legal services.

Here are the phone numbers for contracted service providers:

  • The ABA Immigration Justice Project – 619 736-3315
  • The Southern California Immigration Project – 619 516-8119
  • Jewish Family Service – 858 516-3365

Nabaltec AG achieves record numbers in fiscal year 2021, confirming guidance for the current fiscal year

0

DGAP-News: Nabaltec AG / Tag(s): Annual Report
Nabaltec AG achieves record numbers in fiscal year 2021, confirming guidance for the current fiscal year
28.04.2022 / 10:00
The issuer is solely responsible for the content of this announcement.

Nabaltec AG achieves record numbers in fiscal year 2021, confirming guidance for the current fiscal year

  • Revenue of €187.0 million in 2021 (2020: €159.6 million)

  • Operating profit (EBIT) of 24.6 million euros

  • According to preliminary figures, the first quarter of 2022 exceeded expectations with revenue growth of 19.1% year-on-year to 54.8 million euros

  • 2022 guidance confirmed despite additional environmental challenges: revenue growth as well as EBIT margin expected in the 10% to 12% range

Schwandorf, April 28, 2022 – In its audited consolidated financial statements for the financial year 2021 published today, Nabaltec AG confirms the preliminary figures from March. Thus, the company achieved a record turnover of 187.0 million euros during the past financial year, against 159.6 million euros the previous year. The operating result (EBIT) amounted to 24.6 million euros, also a record figure. The EBIT margin increased to 13.1%.

“We can be very pleased with the results of 2021, as we exceeded both the previous year and our previous record year of 2019. As a result, we succeeded earlier than expected in returning to our long-term growth path after the slump. temporarily caused by the coronavirus pandemic,” said Johannes Heckmann, CEO of Nabaltec AG. “The development of the boehmite product line is particularly encouraging in 2021, where we were able to increase revenue by more than 50%. Based on the future prospects of this range, we also decided in early April 2022 to restructure the Asian business. in order to serve the market even more deeply and comprehensively.”

In the “Functional Fillers” product segment, Nabaltec’s revenues amounted to €130.6 million in fiscal 2021, compared to €114.2 million the previous year (up 14 .4%). Volume growth was achieved across all product lines. Boehmite’s revenues increased by 51.3% to EUR 24.2 million, compared to EUR 16.0 million the previous year. The share of the product range in the consolidated turnover is therefore around 13% (previous year: 10%).

Revenue for the Specialty Alumina product segment amounted to €56.4 million in 2021, up 24.2% compared to the previous year (€45.4 million ). In particular, the stronger dynamism of the steel and refractory industries encouraged the surge in demand.

Nabaltec started 2022 with strong demand and sales development and needed price increases early in the year. According to preliminary figures, Nabaltec AG achieved a turnover of 54.8 million euros in the first quarter, compared to 46.0 million euros in the same period of the previous year (up by 19.1 %). In the “Functional Fillers” product segment, revenues amounted to 36.9 million euros according to preliminary figures, compared to 32.3 million euros in the same quarter of the previous year. The “Specialty Alumina” product segment generated revenues of EUR 17.9 million, compared to EUR 13.7 million the previous year.

According to preliminary figures, the operating profit (EBIT) amounted to 7.1 million euros in the first quarter of 2022, compared to 3.9 million euros in the first quarter of 2021. The EBIT margin (EBIT in percentage of total performance) was 12.9%.

“We were able to achieve a satisfactory result in the first quarter and are currently seeing a solid sales situation,” said Johannes Heckmann. “Despite the current geopolitical uncertainties caused by the Russian-Ukrainian conflict, the current associated massive increases in the prices of materials and energy, and the
COVID-19 pandemic, which is still not completely over, we maintain our annual forecast published at the beginning of March, with revenue growth between 10% and 12% and an EBIT margin in the same range. We continue to view Nabaltec as being in a very good position, even in the current volatile environment.”

Note: The 2021 Annual Report and the 2021 Annual Financial Statements of Nabaltec AG can be downloaded from the Investor Relations section of www.nabaltec.de/en.

About Nabaltec AG:

Nabaltec AG, headquartered in Schwandorf, an award-winning chemical company for innovation, manufactures, develops and distributes highly specialized aluminum hydroxide and aluminum oxide products on an industrial scale. through its two product segments, “Functional Fillers” and “Specialty Alumina.” The company’s product range includes environmentally friendly flame retardant fillers and functional additives for the plastics industry. Flame retardant fillers are used for example in cables in tunnels, airports, high-rise buildings and electronic devices, while additives have applications in catalysis and in electric vehicles. Nabaltec also produces special oxides for technical ceramics, refractory and polishing industries. Nabaltec maintains production sites in Germany and the United States and plans to further develop its market position by increasing capacity, further optimizing processes and quality, and strategically expanding its product range. With its specialty products, the company strives to achieve market leadership in every segment.

Contact:

Marina Fuchs

Frank Ostermair/Vera Muller

Nabaltec SA

Better Orange IR & HV AG

Telephone: +49 9431 53-205

Telephone: +49 89 8896906-14

Fax: +49 9431 53-260

Fax: +49 89 8896906-66

Email: [email protected]

Email: [email protected]

28.04.2022 Broadcast of a Corporate News, transmitted by the DGAP – a service of EQS Group AG.
The issuer is solely responsible for the content of this announcement.

DGAP distribution services include regulatory announcements, financial/corporate news and press releases.
Archive at www.dgap.de

Senate Democrats grill Zelle for data and responsibility in alleged fraud

Diving brief:

  • Sense. Elizabeth Warren, D-MA, and Robert Menendez, D-NJ, asked the operator of the Zelle payment network, Early Warning Services, in a letter Monday to detail – by May 9 – its efforts to root out scams in response to what lawmakers called “worrying reports of increased fraud”.
  • The senators have asked Early Warning CEO Al Ko to disclose the number of fraud reports the operator has received from Zelle customers in each calendar year since 2017. They also want to know the dollar value of the fraud reported, the number of cases in which Zelle provided refunds – and the value of those refunds – and the number of cases Zelle referred to law enforcement or banking regulators.
  • The P2P platform, owned by seven of the country’s nine largest retail banks, generated $490 billion in transactions in 2021, more than double the $230 billion in volume that rival Venmo brought in the year. latest, according to American Banker.

Overview of the dive:

Lawmakers, both members of the Senate Banking Committee, ask Early Warning how it adjusted its procedures in light of “widespread fraud” that affected 18 million Americans in 2020, according to a New York Times report.

“Your company and the major banks that own and partner with the platform have abdicated responsibility for fraudulent transactions, leaving consumers with no way to recover their funds,” Warren and Menendez wrote to Ko.

The immediacy of transfers through the platform attracts users, the senators claimed, but also makes scams more effective “because consumers do not have the option to cancel a transaction even moments after authorizing it.” , added the senators.

The banks say, however, that they have no obligation to return money to defrauded customers, as long as the users involved authenticate the transfers themselves, Warren and Mendez wrote.

The senators pointed to a clarification from the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB) published, noting that Regulation E of the Electronic Funds Transfer Act protects victims of fraudulent money transfers, even when they have been “coaxed” into transferring funds themselves.

A March report from the Federal Deposit Insurance Corp. (FDIC)meanwhile, found that banks and platforms like Zelle have been held liable for fraudulent wire transfers under Regulation E.

The senators asked Ko if Regulation E applied to the scams seen on Zelleand whether Early Warning or an affected customer’s bank would be responsible for refunds.

In a statement to Banking Dive, Early Warning Services said it was reviewing the letter and would provide a response “in due course”.

Early Warning Services is owned by Bank of America, Truist, Capital One, JPMorgan Chase, PNC Bank, US Bank and Wells Fargo.

Smart virtual assistant to achieve US$ valuation

0

USA, Rockville MD, April 26, 2022 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — According to a recently released Fact.MR report, the global intelligent virtual assistant market is expected to grow at a compound annual rate (CAGR) of 28.2% between 2022 and 2032. The market is expected to reach $62 billion by the end of 2032. The request smart virtual assistant is expected to increase over the forecast period and the market was valued at US$3.9 billion in 2021

Go through the in-depth table of contents on “Request for smart virtual assistant Market”

24 Tables and

72 figures

170 pages

Sales of intelligent virtual assistants are expected to increase significantly. In addition to this, the sales of intelligent virtual assistants are increasing, accounting for US$14 billion by 2026. Rising sales of intelligent virtual assistants are also expected to contribute to the growth of intelligent virtual assistants market share .

The intelligence technology embedded in these systems denotes the ability to understand, reason and learn. These three aspects are most important in simulating a customer service agent’s ability to answer questions.

For critical information on smart virtual assistant Market, demand a Sample report
https://www.factmr.com/connectus/sample?flag=S&rep_id=7269

Text-to-text, speech-to-text, text-to-speech, and speech-to-speech are just some of the interaction mechanisms used by intelligent virtual assistant systems to help users complete their tasks. In recent years, the global intelligent virtual assistant market forecast has witnessed a significant increase.

During the projected period, it is expected to show even more robust intelligent virtual assistant market potential. By decreasing customer service efforts, an intelligent virtual assistant improves business revenue.

Which segment is likely to lead the Intelligent Virtual Assistant Market by Application?

With a revenue share of 18.5% in 2020, the consumer electronics category led the industry in terms of market size. Automotive is becoming one of the fastest growing sectors in the intelligent virtual assistant market, with continued expansion expected in the future.

The integration of the virtual assistant with the infotainment system facilitates the delivery of personalized equipment while improving comfort and convenience. Several manufacturers, including Daimler, BMW and Hyundai, have integrated voice-activated infotainment systems into their vehicles. This influences the global adoption trends of intelligent virtual assistants.

To learn more about smart virtual assistant Market, you can contact our analyst at https://www.factmr.com/connectus/sample?flag=AE&rep_id=7269

Key segments covered by the smart virtual assistant Industry survey

  • By product
  • By technology
    • text to talk
    • Speech recognition
    • Text-based
  • By industry vertical
    • Consumer electronics
    • BFSI
    • Health care
    • Education
    • Retail
    • Government
    • Utilities
    • travel and hospitality
    • Others

Competitive landscape

Alphabet Inc., Amazon.com Inc., Apple Inc., Artificial Solutions, EGain Corporation, International Business Machines Corporation, IPsoft Inc., Nuance Communications Inc., Verint Systems Inc. and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. key players in the intelligent virtual assistant market.

  • May 2019: AI-powered voice interaction, a new nuanced car mobility assistant smart personal assistant arrives BMW’s personal assistant, powering a host of features that are core to the in-car experience, including customizable voice-powered wake word. interaction, voice-activated smart car manual, and more.
  • One of the lab’s most recent developments is CSS Corp’s Yoda, a virtual assistant platform that enables voice and text-based interactions for customer management. It is a full-service solution with extensive data entry, analysis and reporting capabilities. It is driven by AI capabilities and advanced quantifiable models that enable customer lifecycle management to understand customer purpose and concerns and proactively hit the target with the right offers and solutions. .

Get customization on smart virtual assistant Market Report for specific search solutions
https://www.factmr.com/connectus/sample?flag=RC&rep_id=7269

The key players in the smart virtual assistant Market

  • VoiceVault Inc.
  • Voicebox Technologies Corp.
  • Uniphore Software Solutions Pvt Ltd
  • Sony Company
  • Samsung Electronics
  • Next IT company
  • Nuance Communications Inc.
  • Inbenta Technologies

To understand how our report can make a difference to your business strategy, purchase a copy of this report at https://www.factmr.com/checkout/7269

Main takeaways from smart virtual assistant Market research

● Increasingly, intelligent virtual assistants are playing the role of customer support agents. For businesses, virtual assistants provide a friendlier customer and brand experience. Examples include Five9’s introduction of Five9 Virtual Assistant in June 2020 with Inference Solutions. The technology uses conversational AI to automate manual activities and respond to typical contact center requests.
● Additionally, the skills of these assistants can be tailored to the end user, increasing customer satisfaction. For example, virtual assistants can help customers find a doctor, renew prescriptions, and get payment reminders.
● Apple’s Siri, Microsoft’s Cortana and Google Assistant are all popular virtual personal assistants in the healthcare industry. Additionally, small and medium-sized enterprises are pushing smart virtual assistant technologies, making them key players in smart virtual assistants for health.
● In addition to healthcare, retail organizations are using chatbots to improve customer experience through popular messaging apps. Retailers like Domino’s are using AI and machine learning to create virtual assistants like chatbots that allow customers to purchase directly through Messenger.
● The Spring 2020 Smart Audio Report indicates that due to the COVID-19 outbreak, approximately 77% of individuals in the United States have changed their routines and voice assistant usage has increased, which has had a favorable impact on market growth.
● Companies are also launching products to help consumers stay informed. Wipro Ventures’ portfolio company Avaamo has released Project COVID, a publicly accessible and interactive COVID-19 smart virtual assistant that helps locate answers quickly in plain English.

To explore Fact.MR’s Cover on the JTechnological field-
Computer Aided Engineering Market Forecast – The flexibility and cost-effectiveness of cloud computing are key factors in the growing adoption of computer-aided engineering. For computer-aided engineering systems, cloud computing avoids the significant expense of hardware procurement, installation, and supporting infrastructure.

Computer Aided Detection Market Trends – Computer-aided detections allow the early detection of diseases that can be devastating, such as cancer. Patients were encouraged to choose random tests and controls following this. Due to these factors, the global computer aided detection market is expected to witness rapid expansion.

Network Access Control Market Analysis – Network Access Control (NAC) has come a long way, and a number of industry leaders have developed solutions to help it continue to evolve over the years. With an ever-increasing number of large and small and medium enterprises, North America will continue to be the most attractive market for network access control.

Big Data Technologies and Services Market Scope – The growing importance of big data technology in the Internet of Things is the most recent trend that is accelerating in the big data and services (IoT) industry. As a result, several industries are adopting big data services in order to manage huge amounts of data and generate useful insights.

About Us:
Market research and consulting agency that makes the difference! That’s why 80% of Fortune 1000 companies trust us to make their most critical decisions. Although our experienced consultants use the latest technology to extract hard-to-find information, we believe that our USP is the trust our clients place in our expertise. Covering a wide range – from automotive and Industry 4.0 to healthcare and retail, our coverage is extensive, but we ensure that even the most niche categories are analyzed. Our sales offices in the USA and Dublin, Ireland. Headquarters based in Dubai, United Arab Emirates. Contact us with your goals and we will be a competent research partner.

Contact:
Mahendra Singh
Japan Sales Office
4-1-1 Nakano,
9F Nakano Sunplaza
Tokyo, 164-8512
Japan
E: [email protected]

Why US oil companies aren’t coming to the rescue of Europe

0

“The model has totally changed,” he said.

Oil executives also say they are spending a lot of money on new oil and gas production, but inflation is undermining their efforts. Exploration and production spending will increase by more than 20% this year, but about two-thirds of that increase will be used to pay higher prices for labor, materials and services, among other costs. according to RBN Energy, a Houston-based research firm.

“It’s a bit of a shock because we’re seeing inflation across the industry,” Jeff Miller, chief executive of Halliburton, which drills wells and provides other services to oil companies, told analysts during a briefing. a recent conference call.

Small private companies, financed by private capital, are responsible for much of the new activity. According to the Dallas Fed survey, the median growth rate for companies producing less than 10,000 barrels per day was expected to be 15% this year, compared to just 6% for companies producing more than 10,000 barrels per day. .

The big oil companies complain that even if they wanted to invest more, it would be difficult because Wall Street does not like to finance new fossil fuel projects. Some investors concerned about climate change are choosing to put their money in renewable energy, electric cars and other businesses instead.

It’s not that investors have become environmentalists. Many have analyzed the numbers and concluded that the recent spike in fossil fuel prices will be short-lived and that they are better off investing in companies and industries they believe have a better future.

“If you are an investor, has your vision for the next five to ten years really changed? I think the answer is no,” said Amy Myers Jaffe, executive director of the Climate Policy Lab at Tufts University’s Fletcher School. “History tells us that oil shocks accelerate the shift to alternative energy, not the other way around.”

Many oil executives also complain that the future of their industry is clouded by political and regulatory uncertainty. They acknowledge Mr. Biden has called on them to produce more, but they fear his administration will reemphasize the need for less oil and gas when prices fall.

British government borrows by half but still close to record | Budget deficit

0

Britain’s gradual emergence from the Covid-19 pandemic has meant government borrowing has more than halved in the last financial year but remained the third highest on record, latest figures show. officials.

The Office for National Statistics said the gap between government income and expenditure was £151.8bn in the 12 months to March, down from £317.6bn sterling the previous year.

Despite the improvement for the year as a whole, the total deficit for 2021-22 was more than £20bn higher than forecast by the Office of Budget Responsibility predicted when preparing estimates for Rishi Sunak’s spring statement last month.

The Chancellor said the economy was recovering and public finances were improving, but said previous borrowing had left a legacy of debt.

“Public debt is at its highest level since the 1960s and rising inflation is driving up our debt interest chargeswhich means that we must manage public finances in a sustainable way to avoid indebting future generations with new debts,” Sunak said.

Borrowing in March alone was £18.1billion – less than had been forecast by the city – but still the second highest since modern records began in 1947.

Sign up for the daily Business Today email or follow Guardian Business on Twitter at @BusinessDesk

According to the ONS, the national debt – the accumulation of borrowing over time – stood at £2.3tn at the end of last month, just over 96% of the annual output of the economy. Debt interest payments hit a record just under £70billion.

Bethany Beckett, a British economist at consultancy Capital Economics, said there would likely be a further decline in the deficit to around £100bn in 2022-23, even if the economy was now slowing down. As a result, the Chancellor would have the option of using her autumn budget to respond to the cost of living crisis.

Michal Stelmach, senior economist at KPMG UK, said: “The borrowing outlook naturally looks better compared to the pressures that have driven it up during the Covid-19 pandemic. In the last financial year alone, the government’s coronavirus job retention and self-employment income support schemes together cost the taxpayer £17billion, while NHS test and trace added £16 additional billion pounds. These programs have now been removed.

Containerboard Market to Reach USD 153.51 Billion by 2029

0

Fortune Business Insights

The companies covered in the containerboard market are Mondi Group (UK) SCG PACKAGING PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED (Thailand) DS Smith (UK) Lee & Man Paper Manufacturing Ltd. (China) Smurfit Kappa (Ireland) International Paper (USA) Oji Fiber Solutions (NZ) Ltd. (Australia) WestRock Company (USA) Rengo Co., Ltd. (Japan) Georgia-Pacific LLC (USA) Hamburger Containerboard (Austria) Nine Dragons Paper (Holdings) Limited (Hong Kong) Stora Enso (Finland) and many others

Pune, India, April 25, 2022 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — The containerboard market size been $126.66 billion in 2021. The market is expected to grow from $129.73 billion in 2022 at $153.51 billion in 2029 at a CAGR of 2.4% during the period 2022-2029. This vital information is presented by Fortune Business Insight™in its report, entitled, “Containerboard Market, 2022-2029. » A factor such as growing demand for sustainable packaging solutions will increase the market footprint over the forecast period.

List of Key Players in Containerboard Market:

  • Mondi Group (UK)

  • SCG PACKAGING PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED (Thailand)

  • DS Smith (UK)

  • Lee & Man Paper Manufacturing Ltd. (China)

  • Smurfit Kappa (Ireland)

  • International Paper (USA)

  • Oji Fiber Solutions (NZ) Ltd. (Australia)

  • WestRock Company (USA)

  • Rengo Co., Ltd. (Japan)

  • Georgia-Pacific LLC (USA)

  • Hamburger Containerboard (Austria)

  • Nine Dragons Paper (Holdings) Limited (Hong Kong)

  • Stora Enso (Finland)

Impact of COVID-19

Disruptive Supply Chains and Disorganized Global Trade to Limit Market Growth During the Pandemic

The ongoing pandemic has severely hampered the market as various countries have declared regional lockdowns to curb the spread of the virus. The market decline was further accelerated by disruptions in supply chains and a broken workforce. Additionally, at the height of the pandemic, many leading manufacturers were forced to operate at less than optimal capacity, creating a wider gap in the demand-supply chain.

Request a sample PDF brochure:

https://www.fortunebusinessinsights.com/enquiry/request-sample-pdf/containerboard-market-102801

segments

Based on material, the market can be divided into virgin and recycled.

By end-user, the market can be divided into food & beverage, personal care & cosmetics, industrial and others.

In terms of geography, the market can be categorized into North America, Europe, Asia Pacific, Latin America, Middle East & Africa.

Report cover

The report contains a detailed approach focusing on crucial factors such as major market players, types of materials and end users and current market trends. Additionally, the report contains the latest research methodology which has been incorporated to amplify the scope of the market. The factors that are expected to have a significant impact on the market are also noted in the report.

Drivers and Constraints

The growth of the food and beverage sector to augment the market growth during the forecast period

Factors such as growing demand for packaging for food and beverages, glassware, electronics, chemicals and consumer products will drive the growth of the containerboard market over the forecast period. Additionally, the durability and eco-friendly nature of containerboards coupled with the ability to be produced with recycled materials will further fuel the growth of the market over the forecast period. Additionally, changing consumer lifestyles and growing demand for ready-to-eat frozen and packaged foods will further fuel the growth of the market.

However, increasing government regulations regarding the use of natural resources will limit the market growth over the forecast period.

Browse Detailed Abstract of Research Report with TOC:

https://www.fortunebusinessinsights.com/containerboard-market-102801

Regional outlook

Asia-Pacific will exert dominance during forecast due to rapid industrialization activities

Asia-Pacific will possess the largest and fastest growing market share during the forecast period owing to rapid industrialization coupled with growing consumer preference opting for ready-to-use packaged food and beverages , to name a few.

North America is expected to take a considerable market share in terms of global contribution owing to the increased use of sustainable products coupled with the ability to offer lightweight and durable packaging features.

Europe is expected to witness a large market share over the forecast period owing to the growing demand for cosmetics and personal care.

Competitive landscape

Prominent Players Arrange Growth Strategies to Dominate During Forecast

The corrugated cardboard sector represents a strongly consolidated market with the top 5 players holding 20% ​​of the global production supply. The dominant market players have invested heavy investments in their R&D development for water-resistant and recyclable products. These strategies should gain a competitive edge among global leaders. For example, in September 2021, Rengo Co., Ltd announced that Vina Kraft Paper Co. Ltd decided to build a new corrugated board production base in Vietnam with the help of a joint venture. The newly built factory further aims to create sustainable development and growth in the region of Vietnam. Additionally, players are also focusing on increasing strategic entanglements such as mergers and acquisitions and collaborations to gain a larger consumer base.

Find out before you buy this research report:

https://www.fortunebusinessinsights.com/enquiry/queries/containerboard-market-102801

Detailed Table of Contents:

TOC Continued….!

Development of key industry

  • September 2021: Rengo Co., Ltd. announced that Vina Kraft Paper Co., Ltd. had decided to build a new corrugated cardboard production base in Vietnam through a joint venture. With the newly built factory, Vina Kraft Paper will firmly establish its presence in Vietnam and aim for sustainable development and growth.

Talk to our expert:

https://www.fortunebusinessinsights.com/enquiry/speak-to-analyst/containerboard-market-102801

Take a look at related research information:

pulp and paper market Analysis of the size, share and impact of COVID-19, by category (packaging and packaging, printing and editorial, sanitary, print media and others) and regional forecasts, 2021-2028

thermal paper market Size, Share, and Industry Analysis, by Width (2.25″, 3.125″ and Others), by Printing Technology (Direct Thermal, Thermal Transfer and Others), by Application (Point of Sale, tags and labels, ticketing, lottery and games, medicine and others) and regional forecast, 2020-2027

About Us:

Fortune Business Insight™ provides accurate data and innovative business analysis, helping organizations of all sizes make the right decisions. We tailor innovative solutions to our clients, helping them address a variety of challenges unique to their businesses. Our goal is to provide them with global market intelligence, providing them with a granular overview of the market in which they operate.

Address:

Fortune Business Insights Pvt. Ltd.9th Floor, Icon Tower, Baner –

Mahalunge Street, Baner, Pune-411045,

Maharashtra, India.

Call:

USA: +1 424 253 0390

UK: +44 2071 939123

APAC: +91 744 740 1245

E-mail: [email protected]

LinkedIn Facebook Twitter

KB overtakes banking rivals with record first-quarter profits

0

South Korea’s KB Financial Group outperformed its local rivals, posting record net profit for the first three months of the year, as the overall performance of the banking sector was supported by an increase in interest and fee income, according to regulatory filings released April 22.

KB’s net income rose 14.4% year-on-year to 1.45 trillion won ($1.17 billion) in the January-March period. Operating profit rose 8.9 percent year-on-year to 1.9 trillion won during the cited period.

Interest income rose 18.6 percent year-on-year to 2.64 trillion won, supported by strong loans to households and businesses. KB plans to pay investors a dividend of 500 won per share and regularize quarterly dividends, the company said in a statement.

KB’s industrial competitor Shinhan Financial Group came in second, posting net profit of 1.4 trillion won, a record first-quarter performance and a 17.5% year-on-year gain. It jumped 199% quarter over quarter. Operating profit rose 13.29% to 1.9 trillion won, supported by interest income which rose 17.4% year-on-year to 2.48 trillion won.

Shinhan plans to pay a quarterly dividend of 400 won per share and distribute the same amount for the second and third quarters, according to the company.

Loans to households by its flagship Shinhan Bank fell 19.2% due to tighter regulations and controls, but loans to businesses rose 1.9% during the cited period.

Hana Financial Group ranked third with net profit of 902.2 billion won during the same period, up 8 percent from a year earlier. Operating profit rose 2.2% year-on-year to 1.1 trillion won.

Woori ranked fourth with net profit of 884.2 billion won in the first three months of the year, up 32 percent year-on-year. Net profit jumped 106% quarter-on-quarter. Operating profit rose 31.6% year-on-year to 1.23 trillion won, while interest income rose 22.7% to 1.99 trillion won during the same period.

Despite market concerns over tighter lending regulations imposed on banks by financial authorities to reduce the country’s growing household debt, banks were able to hoard money through higher borrowing rates. The Bank of Korea, the central bank, raised its benchmark rate by a quarter of a percentage point to 1.5%, marking its fourth pandemic-era rate hike since August last year, making raise borrowing rates.

“While fears of an economic slowdown continue to exist as a key risk, banking groups will likely perform above expectations for some time, supported by central bank rate hikes,” Choi said. Jung-wook, analyst at Hana Financial Investment.

THE KOREA HERALD/ASIA INFORMATION NETWORK

Wetumpka may close fields at Wetumpka Youth Baseball & Softball League

WETUMPKA, Ala. (WSFA) – The Town of Wetumpka may soon close the grounds at the Wetumpka Sports Complex to youth baseball and softball leagues.

According to an email from the Wetumpka Youth Baseball & Softball League board of directors, the city will close the fields beginning at 8 a.m. Sunday. They would remain closed for league play. until the city gets signed agreements from the “league and financial disclosures which will include bank statements for the past 24 months and all monthly treasury reports for the past 24 months.”

The league said the agreements sent by the city would give the city full access to league funds. The League’s board said in the email that it could not agree to sign these “contracts giving the city full access to our funds”.

The league said in response to the city’s original contracts that the league and city had previously reached an agreement that was beneficial to both parties and even encouraged the contract. However, the league does not want to give the city “full control of the League and unlimited access to family funds in our area.”

The league says in 2021 it has agreed to go halfway with the city to resurface the infields of all softball fields. The cost of the project was $20,000 and the league paid $10,000.

In the fall of 2021, the league provided a free-fall ball to over 500 children in the community. The league said the cost of the fall ball was $17,000.

The league added that it helped the city with a list of projects to complete before the start of Spring Ball, which totaled $8,500.

The league says it has invested a total of $35,500 in fields and families in one year.

According to the league, it had to operate with losses several times each year before 2021. And based on the information the league has, it “has never been in a financial position to be able to help with projects like these. in the past.”

“We are extremely grateful to the city for allowing us to use this incredible complex rent-free for all these years,” the league said. “In recognition of what the City has done for us as soon as we were financially able, we were thrilled to finally be able to contribute to some much needed upgrades to our ballpark. »

According to the league, she responded with an offer to sign the agreement without the language that would give Wetumpka access to their children’s funds. However, the city reportedly told the league that its proposal was unacceptable. The league said it had offered to sign a short-term liability release contract through the end of the spring All-Stars to allow for the completion of the 2022 season.

The league says closing the fields will end baseball’s midseason tournament.

“We apologize for the disruption to our spring league season, but we hope our league families understand how difficult the position the city has placed us in and agree with the concerns we have. to give the municipal government full control of our league. and unlimited access to our youth funds,” the league said in the email.

The league added that it is optimistic that the city will modify its demands and meet with them to discuss and find an agreement that makes sense for the city and for the youth and families of the league.

The City of Wetumpka posted the following statement on Facebook:

“Over the past few months, the Town of Wetumpka has been working with the Youth Baseball and Softball League to secure agreements for the use of town lands at no cost to the league. We asked with an agreement, audited financial statements. We have a responsibility to oversee operations on public city property, which requires league transparency. The city demands financial responsibility. This is consistent with all public services in all forms of municipal government, including when such government services are outsourced to non-profit organizations. All the agreement requires is that the league retain operating funds and the remaining proceeds be reinvested in maintaining the facility. The city does not receive any registration or sponsorship money and neither do we want it. We want the league to succeed for the benefit of our children, but we also have a responsibility to be responsible for the funds paid into public property. The same requirements apply to all public facilities, not just softball and baseball diamonds. At this time, the league has left the city with no choice but to close the grounds until a win-win resolution can be reached.

Copyright 2022 WSFA 12 News. All rights reserved.

Independence Realty Trust, Inc. (NYSE:IRT) shares rally, but financials look ambiguous: Will the momentum continue?

0

Most readers already know that shares of Independence Realty Trust (NYSE:IRT) are up a significant 24% in the past three months. However, we decided to pay attention to the fundamentals of the company which do not seem to give a clear indication of the financial health of the company. In this article, we decided to focus on the ROE of Independence Realty Trust.

Return on equity or ROE is an important factor for a shareholder to consider as it tells them how much of their capital is being reinvested. In other words, it reveals the company’s success in turning shareholders’ investments into profits.

Check out our latest analysis for Independence Realty Trust

How is ROE calculated?

the ROE formula is:

Return on equity = Net income (from continuing operations) ÷ Equity

So, based on the above formula, the ROE for Independence Realty Trust is:

1.3% = $46 million ÷ $3.6 billion (based on trailing 12 months to December 2021).

The “return” is the annual profit. One way to conceptualize this is that for every dollar of share capital it has, the company has made a profit of $0.01.

Why is ROE important for earnings growth?

So far we have learned that ROE is a measure of a company’s profitability. We now need to assess how much profit the company is reinvesting or “retaining” for future growth, which then gives us an idea of ​​the company’s growth potential. Assuming all else is equal, companies that have both a higher return on equity and better earnings retention are generally the ones with a higher growth rate compared to companies that don’t. same characteristics.

A side-by-side comparison of Independence Realty Trust’s earnings growth and ROE of 1.3%

As you can see, Independence Realty Trust’s ROE seems quite low. Even compared to the industry average of 6.9%, the ROE figure is quite disappointing. Despite this, Independence Realty Trust has been able to grow its net income significantly, at a rate of 29% over the past five years. We believe there could be other factors at play here. For example, the business has a low payout ratio or is efficiently managed.

In a next step, we benchmarked Independence Realty Trust’s net income growth against the industry, and fortunately, we found that the growth the company saw was above the industry average growth of 11%. .

past earnings-growth

The basis for attaching value to a company is, to a large extent, linked to the growth of its profits. It is important for an investor to know whether the market has priced in the expected growth (or decline) in the company’s earnings. By doing so, they will get an idea if the stock is headed for clear blue waters or if swampy waters are waiting. Has the market integrated the future prospects of the IRT? You can find out in our latest infographic research report on intrinsic value.

Does Independence Realty Trust Use Retained Earnings Effectively?

Independence Realty Trust has a very high three-year median payout ratio of 105%, suggesting that the company’s shareholders are paid from more than the company’s earnings. However, this did not hamper its ability to grow as we saw earlier. However, it might be worth keeping an eye on the high payout rate, as this is a huge risk. Our risk dashboard should feature the 4 risks we have identified for Independence Realty Trust.

Additionally, Independence Realty Trust paid dividends over a nine-year period. This shows that the company is committed to sharing profits with its shareholders. Existing analyst estimates suggest the company’s future payout ratio is expected to drop to 49% over the next three years. Despite the lower expected payout ratio, the company’s ROE is not expected to change much.

Conclusion

Overall, we believe that the performance displayed by Independence Realty Trust is subject to many interpretations. Although the company has recorded impressive earnings growth, its low ROE and poor earnings retention make us doubt that this growth can continue, if by any chance the business faces any kind of risk. Looking at current analyst estimates, we found that analysts expect the company to continue its recent growth streak. For more on the company’s future earnings growth forecast, check out this free analyst forecast report for the company to learn more.

Feedback on this article? Concerned about content? Get in touch with us directly. You can also email the editorial team (at) Simplywallst.com.

This Simply Wall St article is general in nature. We provide commentary based on historical data and analyst forecasts only using unbiased methodology and our articles are not intended to be financial advice. It is not a recommendation to buy or sell stocks and does not take into account your objectives or financial situation. Our goal is to bring you targeted long-term analysis based on fundamental data. Note that our analysis may not take into account the latest announcements from price-sensitive companies or qualitative materials. Simply Wall St has no position in the stocks mentioned.

Other Ontario Updates: Bill 88 Receives Royal Assent, Minimum Wage Will Increase October 1, 2022 | Stikeman Elliott LLP

0

On April 11, 2022, the Government of Ontario’s Bill 88, the Labor for Workers Act 2022 (“Bill 88”), received Royal Assent. Earlier this year we wrote about Law 88 on this blog, while still in second reading. In addition to modifying the Employment Standards Act 2000 (the “ESA”) to require employers to put in place a written policy regarding electronic monitoring, Bill 88 introduces new penalties under Ontario law Occupational Health and Safety Act (“LSST”) and enacts new legislation called the Digital Platforms Workers Rights Act 2022 (the “Digital Law”) to provide certain rights and minimum entitlements to workers in the gig economy, among other changes.

Below is a summary of the key provisions introduced by Bill 88, as well as an update on the upcoming minimum wage rate increase.

Minimum wage rate:

The Ontario government has announcement that effective October 1, 2022, the general minimum wage rate will increase from $15 per hour to $15.50. Special minimum wage rates will also increase, as detailed in the announcement.

Written policy on electronic monitoring

Pursuant to Bill 88, the ESA was amended to require Ontario employers with 25 or more workers as of January 1 of each year to put in place a written policy regarding electronic employee monitoring by March 1 of that year. (a politic “).

The Policy must contain the following information:

  • whether the employer electronically monitors employees and, if so, a description of how and under what circumstances the employer may electronically monitor employees, and the purposes for which information obtained through electronic monitoring may be used by the employer;
  • the date the policy was prepared and the date any changes were made to the policy; and
  • any other prescribed information (please note that there are no regulations yet regarding Bill 88).

Particularly for employers, Bill 88 clarifies that the new electronic monitoring policy provisions do not affect or limit an employer’s ability to utilize information obtained through electronic monitoring of their employees.

On a transitional basis, employers with 25 or more employees in January 2022 have until October 11, 2022 to implement their policy.

A copy of the policy must be provided to employees within 30 days of the day the employer is required to put the policy in place or, if an existing policy is changed, within 30 days of the changes being made. New employees must receive the policy within 30 days of their start date (or, if later, 30 days from the day the employer is required to have a policy in place). The policy must be kept for 3 years after it ceases to be in force.

Next steps:

Employers should begin to review their electronic monitoring practices and be prepared to develop a written policy that meets the requirements outlined above. Although the relevant ESA amendments do not define “electronic monitoring”, organizational monitoring methods such as keystroke tracking, GPS devices and monitoring of corporate mobile devices should be considered when preparation of the appropriate policy. We will continue to monitor any regulations or guidelines establishing our additional requirements for electronic monitoring policies and will provide updates as they become available. For more information on electronic monitoring policies, please also see our previous blog post.

Certain business and IT consultants not subject to the ESA

Bill 88 amends section 3 of the ESA to specify that as of January 1, 2023, the ESA will not apply to certain business and information technology consultants, defined in the legislation as follows (each, a “Consultant”):

  • business consultant” means a person who provides advice or services to a business or organization with respect to its performance, including advice or services with respect to operations, profitability, management, structure, processes, finances , accounting, purchasing, human resources, environmental impacts, marketing, risk management, compliance or corporate or organizational strategy; and
  • information technology consultant“means a person who provides advice or services to a business or organization with respect to its information technology systems, including advice or services relating to planning, design, analysis, documentation, configuration, development, testing and installation of corporate or organizational information technology systems.

To be exempt from ESA, a consultant must meet the following criteria:

  1. provide services through (i) a company of which he is a director or shareholder party to a unanimous shareholders’ agreement or (ii) a sole proprietorship of which the consultant is the sole owner;
  1. be subject to a service agreement that specifies when the consultant will be paid and the amount they will receive, which must be greater than $60 per hour (excluding bonuses, commissions, expenses and travel allowances and benefits) and must be expressed as an hourly rate; and
  1. be paid the amount stated in the agreement above.

Further requirements may be prescribed in the future and as such we continue to monitor regulations and/or guidance.

Next steps:

Employers will need to be vigilant when hiring business and IT consultants as independent contractors to ensure they meet the criteria set out in the ESA. Failure to do so may result in liability for misclassification under the ESA. Employers should also ensure that any future independent contractor agreement for business and IT consultants (including all models) will establish a payment schedule and provide for payment of an hourly rate of at least less $60 per hour as described above.

Protections for Workers in Response to Opioid Use

Bill 88 amends OHSA to require employers to provide naloxone kits if they become aware, or reasonably ought to know, that there may be a risk of a worker experiencing an opioid overdose at a location workplace where that worker works for the employer. In these circumstances (and any other circumstances that may be prescribed in the future), the employer must also comply with requirements regarding training and the use and maintenance of naloxone kits. These amendments to the OHSA are not yet in force and will come into force on a date to be proclaimed.

Naloxone is an opioid antidote which, if given in response to an opioid overdose, can reverse the overdose.

Next steps:

The Ontario government has construction sites, bars and nightclubs identified such as the high-risk settings that are most affected by the opioid epidemic. Employers in these sectors should be especially aware of this high risk, monitor their workforce for any signs of opiate addiction, and be prepared to have naloxone kits and training in place when needed.

Increased penalties under the OHSA

Effective July 1, 2022, penalties for OHSA convictions will increase significantly as a result of Bill 88. Specifically:

  • the maximum fine under the OHSA for those who violate or fail to comply with the law has been increased from $100,000 to $500,000; and
  • a new sanction is provided for directors and officers who contravene or fail to comply with their obligation to take reasonable precautions to ensure that the company complies with the OHSA. Directors and officers who violate this requirement are now liable to a fine of up to $1,500,000, imprisonment for up to 12 months, or both.

The OHSA now also includes a list of aggravating factors that must be considered by the Ministry of Labor when determining a penalty, including, for example, whether the person ignored an inspector’s order, a history of OHSA non-compliance or the violation was reckless, resulted in the death or serious injury of a worker, or was motivated by a desire to increase revenue or reduce costs. Post-violation behavior may also be considered, such as whether the individual attempts to conceal the violation from the Department of Labor or fails to cooperate with an investigation.

The statute of limitations for laying charges under the OHSA has been extended from one to two years from the date of the order.

Next steps:

Going forward, directors and officers of a company, as well as managers and supervisors, should continue to ensure that their training is current and up-to-date so that they can demonstrate that they know the policies workplace health and safety (e.g. workplace violence and harassment policy and related programs).

Digital Platforms Workers Rights Act 2022: new rights for gig workers

The new digital law was created to give rights to workers who perform work on a digital platform. Individuals in this industry are generally engaged as independent contractors and, when characterized as such, do not benefit from the rights and protections granted to employees under the ESA. The law aims to establish minimum rights for these workers.

Work on a digital platform is defined under the Act as “the provision of ride-sharing, delivery, courier or other services prescribed by workers who are offered work assignments by an operator through the use of a digital platform”, commonly referred to as “work on demand”. .”

New rights for gig workers established under the law include right to information, recurring pay periods and pay days, minimum wage payable under the ESA, notice of termination of a digital platform (along with an explanation of why) and the right to resolve work-related disputes and freedom from retaliation (among other things).

The law will come into force on a date to be set by the Lieutenant Governor (meaning it is not yet in force).

Next steps:

Businesses that hire workers who perform work on digital platforms should familiarize themselves with the rights created under the Act, as well as the relevant rules, processes and requirements set out therein with respect to record keeping. and the app.

NAGA Sees Record Revenues, Obtains Estonian License for Its Crypto Brand

0

NAGA Group, a provider of brokerage services, cryptocurrency platform NAGAX and neo-banking app NAGA Pay, announced preliminary financial results for the first quarter of 2022, which beat analysts’ forecasts.

Looking at the numbers, NAGA Group reported record revenue, significant user growth and nearly doubled profits after fourth quarter metrics took a hit.

Revenues from the group’s brokerage activity amounted to 18 million euros, up 63% compared to 11.7 million euros the previous year. The strong growth was underlined by a record EBITDA of €5 million, which is also up two-thirds from the €3 million figure in the first quarter of 2021.

In its latest annual report, the listed fintech attributed most of its strong performance to the copy-trading business. In particular, NAGA saw over 4.8 million transactions copied through its auto-copy tool, almost triple the 1.7 million transactions copied in 2020.

In terms of trading volumes, the company recorded a record €250 billion, up 107% from €121 billion in 2020. NAGA, which offers equity and crypto investments through its app mobile, reports that its trading platform has onboarded more than 277,000 new accounts. in 2021, an increase of 128% compared to last year.

NAGAX Obtains Estonian Cryptography License

“We are pleased to see a dynamic start in 2022 and NAGA to continue to achieve its objectives. The unfortunate escalation in Ukraine did indeed affect customer appetite during the first quarter, but started to recover in late March. Taking this opportunity, we would like to express our warmest condolences to the affected Ukrainian people and note that no people in this world should ever have to experience this horror,” said CEO Benjamin Bilski.

The Germany-based broker last month announced the launch of its brand new cryptocurrency-focused social trading platform. NAGAX consists of a futures and derivatives exchange, a crypto wallet, an integrated NFT platform, a staking platform and a spot exchange with approximately 700 tradable assets. The platform also aims to provide a unique Web3 social trading experience, in which user-generated content on the platform is converted into NFTs that can be monetized.

NAGAX offers customers quick access to the native NAGA coin, the NAGA coin. The exchange is also connected to the financial community and its parent company’s social investment network, bringing together more than half a million traders from around the world. The network is a digital space for newcomers and skilled traders to share their experiences, discuss core issues and market conditions via personal, group or public chats.

Additionally, the company is focused on expanding its regulatory map, having recently secured an Estonian crypto license for NAGAX. Additionally, two more crypto asset service provider licenses are in the pipeline and are expected to be granted in the second quarter of 2022, the company said.

Designing benefits and overcoming barriers to accessing alternative therapies in TRD

Steven Levine, MD: Carrie, can you tell us about what getting intranasal esketamine entails? [Spravato]the different paths, whether purchasing and billing or specialty pharmacy, and the challenges or obstacles you encountered in this process?

Carrie Jardine: There are 2 ways to get the medicine. One is to order through the patient’s specialty pharmacy, and then the pharmacy bills the insurance company. This removes some of the financial liability from the supplier of this drug. The medicine is then sent to the office for us to give to the patient. The other way is buy and bill i.e. we buy the medicine directly from a REMS [Risk Evaluation and Mitigation Strategy]– certified provider, we pay for this drug, then we bill the insurance company on behalf of the patient once this drug is administered to the patient.

At the beginning, it is important to see if you can take the financial risk of the drugs because reimbursement can take a long time. There are payers who take 30-45 days to pay claims. These are treatments in which patients receive several rather expensive treatments over a few days each week. If you buy and invoice, this can represent quite a significant financial liability for the individual supplier. Depending on the size of your practice, you can sometimes assume this responsibility and wait for payers to pay.

The other thing is that some patients’ plans have specifications on whether they want you to go through a specialty pharmacy or whether you can buy and bill. There are also financial considerations on the patient’s side, because whether you are using pharmacy benefits or medical benefits, there may also be different responsibilities for the patient. These are all things to consider when deciding whether you want to purchase and bill for the drugs or go through the patient’s specialty pharmacy.

Steven Levine, MD: Let’s dive deeper into some of the billing and coding considerations to support patient access to intranasal esketamine and other alternative therapies. I’m going to lean pretty heavily on Ms. Jardine here, but let’s start with Dr. Rosenzweig. Can you tell us a bit about the strategies you use for TRD [treatment-resistant depression] treatments to ensure appropriate access?

Martin Rosenzweig, MD: That’s a great question because there’s this mistaken belief that insurers are in place to create barriers. I would like to talk a bit about the process we have for reviewing treatment approval. Much of what is covered is determined by benefit design, which is how the employers who use us design what they want to cover or exclude. We are all subject to parity. This is also a key factor behind it. When we review a specific treatment, the general rule is that we follow the FDA [Food and Drug Administration] guidelines. If a treatment is FDA approved, there may be a lag of a month or 2, but that’s generally what our policy follows. With esketamine, that’s pretty much what our policy looks like. It follows what the federal government recommends.

The problem with some of the treatments, including ECT [electroconvulsive therapy], is that it may require prior authorization in some regimes. A die [responsibilities] as cost stewards is to ensure that there is appropriate use of these expensive resources. SMT [transcranial magnetic stimulation] certainly has its place, but one of the concerns we have with new treatments is whether they are being used appropriately. In our experience, the majority of providers try to do what is right for the patient. there is no doubt. But there is a small subset where there is a risk of fraud, waste or abuse. Part of our role is to put things in place to ensure that there is no overuse or inappropriate use. This is part of the reason for the prior authorization process in some areas.

To give an example with transcranial magnetic stimulation, it is approved and covered by most plans, but the risk is that it will be overused. Someone can show up and it’s the first thing they’re offered just because [the provider] has this expensive machine and you need a volume of patients to cover the cost. It’s not appropriate. A big part of what drives this is the concern that we reserve resources where they are most appropriate. I also talked about the choice of drugs. Start with those that are most cost-effective for the patient as well as in terms of co-payments, using generics.

We have 2 processes. There is a pharmacy and therapeutics committee that reviews all of this and the recommendations and then writes the policy. Under my medical policy team, we also have a Technology Assessment Committee, or TAC, that reviews these emerging technologies and data, researching whether the evidence is strong enough to support their adoption. The reason for this is that the benefit design only supports evidence-based or FDA-approved treatments. I will give an example. With intravenous ketamine, there is preliminary literature that it may be effective. We don’t have robust, multicenter, placebo-controlled studies, but it’s not FDA-cleared for this use, so we have to stick with the wording of the benefit until the research is there. Understand it also from our point of view. It is the need for evidence that the treatment is effective.

Transcripts edited for clarity.

Stock market rally: Sensex jumps over 800 points: 4 factors driving the rally

0
NEW DELHI: National benchmark stock indices continued to rally for the second straight session on Thursday as low-level buying continued on Dalal Street. The buying in the past two days comes after nearly 5% decline in the previous five sessions.

The 30-stock BSE Sensex advanced over 800 points to 57,870 while its broader counterpart NSE Nifty rose 241 points to the 17,378 level. The market rose despite most of the negative global indicators. Sensex finished up 574 points yesterday.

“Markets often overreact, both up and down. As sanity sets in, prices normalize. Stretched valuations for IT stocks, especially in the IT sector mid caps, were the consequence of the market overreacting to strong earnings results and good earnings visibility,” said VK Vijayakumar, Chief Investment Strategist at Geojit Financial Services.

Below are the main factors driving the markets higher:


Buy with confidence
One of the dominant themes of the past two days has been the massive buying at Reliance Industries. The stock which carries significant weight in Nifty and Sensex hit record highs on Thursday. The purchase reflects the company’s focus on its retail business.

In addition, in its petchem business, prospects have improved following the war that broke out in Ukraine. It now exports more products to Europe. The increase in refining margins is also creating a positive mood around the stock.

Lower yields
Another factor that worked in favor of the market was the overnight drop in US bond yields, although this may prove to be short-lived.

The 10-year paper yield was last at 2.8766%, a little higher in Asian trading but still battered after falling 2.981% early Wednesday. Falling yields sent the dollar lower overnight, especially against the battered euro and sterling which managed to recover some ground.

Low yields typically drive inflows into Indian stocks.

Low Level Purchase
The market saw buying at every dip, thanks to massive inflows into mutual funds and retail buying. This is also what happened over the past two days, when the major indices plunged about 5% due to inflation concerns and weak earnings from major companies.

However, fund managers and retail investors once again took advantage of the opportunity even as foreign investors continued to withdraw funds from India.

Technical factor
Technical analysts had said the 17,300 level on Nifty was key for a fresh rally. So once the index recovered to that level, we saw further buying on Thursday. Now, Nifty could be ready for more upside, analysts say.

“A decisive move above 17,300 is likely to confirm a reversal pattern after a higher low at the 16,825 level and this could possibly pull Nifty further upside. Immediate support is placed at the 17,000 level “, said Nagaraj Shetti, technical research analyst at HDFC Securities.

(Disclaimer: The recommendations, suggestions, views and opinions given by the experts are their own. These do not represent the views of Economic Times)

War in Ukraine poses environmental risk now and in the future, advocates say

Placeholder while loading article actions

Good morning! It is Vanessa Montalbano, the Climate 202 researcher, writes the top of the newsletter today. Below, a pipeline leak in Texas would have the same climate impact as the annual emissions of 16,000 cars. But first :

War in Ukraine poses environmental risk now and in the future, advocates say

As Russian forces bombard communities across Ukraine, the nation’s once vibrant ecosystems are increasingly scorched and scarred, rewinding decades of conservation work, according to Ukrainian climate advocates.

Svitlana Romanko, a Ukrainian climate justice activist and former professor of environmental law, told The Climate 202 that the consequences of post-war environmental and biodiversity damage will be felt for years.

“Ukraine has been badly damaged and destroyed and there are cities that don’t even exist anymore,” Romanko said. “Every night, missiles and bombs continue to fly through Ukrainian territory, so these are also natural disasters.”

Nearly a third of the country’s protected waters and lands have been occupied by Russian forces, leaving the Ukrainian government and environmentalists in the dark about climate risks or how the land might have been damaged.

“We hesitate to collect [climate impact data] now, and it’s a bit difficult to do it because of the war. All information is closed,” said Evgenia Zasyadkoclimate policy coordinator for Ecoaction, a Ukrainian environmental organization. “We don’t know what’s going on there.”

Of particular concern is the eastern part of Ukraine, home to industrial infrastructure such as oil depots, coal mines and nuclear power plants, Zasyadko said. Without human regulation, each site could potentially spill fuel and leak toxic planet-warming pollutants into villages, water supplies and the atmosphere.

According to Ukraine Ministry of Energy and Environmental Protectionmore than 1,500 Russian missiles have been launched at Ukraine so far, and more than 5,000 units of various Russian military equipment have been destroyed – all also spilling unchecked amounts of chemicals and greenhouse gases in the air and the ground.

A “war fueled by fossil fuels”

While Russia’s invasion of Ukraine was an unlikely turning point for climate activism, advocates on the ground say phasing out fossil fuel use could reduce devastating climate consequences, while disrupting Russia’s oil-dominated economy.

Romanko argues that without its fossil fuel industry, Russia would not be able to fund the war in Ukraine, adding that much of Russia’s wealth and power comes from its oil and gas exports.

“It’s about energy security, the climate crisis and the war in Ukraine that have the same roots and therefore the same solution,” she said. “It’s a matter of justice. I really want to end the war in my country. We are tired of fossil fuel fueled wars and hostile climate wars.

Oleg Savitskyenergy and policy specialist Ukrainian Climate Networkagreed with Romanko, adding that Russia should be removed from all international groups for disrupting the peace and committing acts of terrorism against both civilians and the environment as a method of warfare.

The act would directly affect Russia’s fossil fuel shipments, according to Savitsky, which he says allows the Kremlin to build its “war machine.”

The Ukrainian climate network plans to call the The United Nations at the Stockholm +50 meeting in June about their fossil fuel non-proliferation treaty to produce an international response to end the expansion of new fossil fuel production, phase out existing production and allow a global just transition to low-emission energy systems.

The meeting, which marks the 50th anniversary of the first-ever international summit on the environment, is a unique opportunity to initiate a globally coordinated effort to combine warming goals with climate justice, compelling rich countries to provide finance and technology to developing countries like Ukraine. , Savitsky said.

“I think we’re now at the breaking point of a global energy and climate policy trajectory and it’s all very much about the war response,” he said.

“Climate policy is doomed if we don’t tackle the central problem, which is the extraction of fossil fuels.”

In a combined effort with the ministry, Zasyadko said she had counted at least 139 cases of what she called “environmental war crimes” committed by Russia during the invasion, which she hopes the country will be charged with and mandated to pay. by the International Criminal Court.

“The number very likely could be much higher,” Zasyadko said. “The real assessment can only take place when Russia leaves Ukrainian territory and we can go in and assess what kind of harm it has really caused us.”

According to the UN Office for Genocide Prevention and the Responsibility to Protect and the Rome Statute of the International Criminal Courta war crime includes launching an attack knowing that it would cause loss of civilian life or “widespread, long-lasting and severe damage to the natural environment which would be manifestly excessive in relation to the concrete and overall military advantage”. live expected.

Romanko noted that proving an environmental crime in court is extremely difficult because you must have proof of causation as well as documented damage to determine reimbursement. But, she added, it is doable.

She said oversight by Zasyadko and the ministry is key to determining what the financial responsibility or punishment for environmental crimes should be down the line.

In terms of rebuilding Ukraine after the war, Savitsky said a “Green Marshall Plan,” similar to what was enacted after World War II, should be adopted internationally to accelerate Ukraine’s clean energy transition while taking into account the layers of societal upheaval caused by war.

During post-war recovery, Savitsky said, it would be easy to rely on fossil fuels again to restore buildings, agriculture and industry, but that would ignore climate goals.

“We will need a complete overhaul of Ukraine’s economy, which is very energy-intensive and focused on the production of raw materials,” Savitsky said. “Ukraine must become a new industrial and renewable energy hub for Europe, but based on clean technologies.”

“It requires the scale of investment only compared to rebuilding Europe after World War II, so we really need a green Marshall Plan for Ukraine,” he said.

Unregulated Texas Pipeline Leaks Massive Amount of Methane

In just over an hour, a gas pipeline in Texas leaked enough methane that, by one estimate, its climate impact was equivalent to the annual emissions of about 16,000 cars, according to Bloomberg. Aaron Clark and Naureen S. Malik report.

The pipeline was a small part of a large network of unregulated pipelines – known as gathering lines – that connect production fields and other sites to larger transmission lines across the United States.

The incident, which happened on March 17, underscores that even tiny parts of this network can have a major climate impact. It comes as new federal reporting requirements for collection lines are due to take effect next month.

LP Energy Transferwhich operates the line through its ETC Texas Pipeline Ltd. unit, said an investigation into the cause of the leak was underway. The company added that it has notified all the appropriate regulatory bodies.

Methane, the main component of natural gas, breaks down faster than carbon dioxide, but is about 80 times more effective at trapping heat in its first 20 years in the atmosphere.

Court declines to consider certificate issue involving Mo. Pipeline

the Supreme Court Monday refused to reconsider a lower court’s decision to remove a federal certificate for the building already constructed Pipeline Spire STL in Missouri, Bloomberg Law’s Mayan Counts reports.

Pipeline Spire STL and Missouri Arrow asked the judges to intervene after the United States Court of Appeals for the DC Circuit thrown away the certificate of the Federal Energy Regulatory Commissionjudging that the commission had not demonstrated the need for the project.

Homes and businesses in the St. Louis area could experience natural gas outages without the project, the businesses warned before the Supreme Court.

Scott Smithpresident of the pipeline, said in a statement that although he was “disappointed” with the judges’ decision, the project will continue to operate under the temporary certificate the commission issued in December.

Hundreds dead and dozens missing after floods in South Africa

More than 440 people have died and dozens are missing after torrential rains triggered severe flooding in eastern South Africa, Danielle Paquettethe Washington Post’s West Africa bureau chief, writes in a photo report showing the devastation.

When the South African President Cyril Ramaphosa visited the hardest hit areas last week, he blamed the flooding on climate change. Scientists warn that extreme storms will become more frequent as the world warms.

Congo logging audit raises concerns over forest protection deal

A report on logging in the Democratic Republic of Congo raises concern among environmentalists over a $500 million forest protection deal announced at the The United Nations last autumn’s climate summit, the Guardian’s patrick greenfield and Fiona Harvey report.

The long-awaited report, released this month by the Congolese government, found that six successive ministers had illegally granted logging companies permission to fell trees 18 times, breaching a 20-year moratorium on new logging in the region. second largest rainforest on the planet.

The audit comes after the British Prime Minister Boris Johnson and Congolese President Felix Tshisekedi signed an agreement at the summit, known as COP26, committing $500 million to protect important forests and peatlands, including $260 million to preserve the Congo Basin.

A Washington Post investigation previously revealed that the Congo is home to the largest expanse of tropical peatlands on the planet, and that disturbing this peatland could release a massive “carbon bomb” into the atmosphere.

High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor Market Size Analysis 2022 by Major Key Players

0

New Jersey, United States,- The Global High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptors Market is comprehensively and thoroughly examined in the report, focusing on the competitive landscape, regional growth, market segmentation, and market dynamics. For the preparation of this in-depth research study, we have used the latest primary and secondary research techniques. The report provides Porter’s Five Forces Analysis, Pusher Analysis, Competition Analysis, Manufacturing Cost Analysis, Sales and Production Analysis and various other types of analysis for To provide a comprehensive overview of the global High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor market. Each segment of the global High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor Market is carefully analyzed on the basis of market share, CAGR, and other significant factors. The global High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor market is also presented statistically using annual growth, CAGR, sales, production, and other important calculations.

We can customize the report to your liking. Our analysts are experts in the study and analysis of the High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor market and have extensive experience in customizing reports, having served tons of clients so far. The main purpose of preparing the research study is to inform you about the future challenges and opportunities in the market. The report is one of the best resources you can use to secure a strong position in the global High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor market.

Get | Download Sample Copy with TOC, Charts and List of Figures @ https://www.marketresearchintellect.com/download-sample/?rid=205309

Our report contains current and latest market trends, company market shares, market forecasts, competition benchmarking, competition mapping and an in-depth analysis of the most important sustainability tactics and their impact on market growth and competition. To estimate the quantitative aspects and to segment the global High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor market, we have used a recommended combination of top-down and bottom-up approaches. We have examined the global high affinity nerve growth factor receptor market from three key angles through data triangulation. Our iterative and comprehensive research methodology helps us deliver the most accurate market forecasts and estimates with minimal errors.

Major Players Covered in High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor Markets:

  • Array Biopharma Inc.
  • Astellas Pharma Inc.
  • Astrazeneca Plc
  • Daiichi Sankyo Co Ltd
  • Dompe Farmaceutici Spa
  • Genzyme Corp.
  • Handok Inc.
  • Ignita Inc.
  • Loxo Oncology Inc
  • Merck & Co Inc.
  • Nerviano Medical Sciences Srl
  • Plexxikon Inc.
  • Proximage SA
  • Rottapharm Biotech Srl
  • Sienna Biopharmaceuticals Inc
  • Tiziana Life Sciences Plc

High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor Market Split By Type:

  • Asp-7962
  • Azd-7451
  • Bnn-27
  • Cenegermin
  • Crb-0089
  • Others

High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor Market Split By Application:

  • Bile duct cancer
  • Papillary thyroid cancer
  • low back pain
  • Lung cancer
  • Others

As part of our quantitative analysis, we have provided regional market forecast and estimate by type and application, market sales forecast and estimate by type, application and region by 2030, and forecast and Global sales and production estimates for High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor by 2030. For the qualitative analysis, we focused on policy & regulatory scenarios, component benchmarking, landscape technology, important market topics, and industry landscape and trends.

We also focused on technological advance, profitability, company size, company valuation against industry and product and application analysis against market growth and market share.

Get | Discount on the purchase of this report @ https://www.marketresearchintellect.com/ask-for-discount/?rid=205309

Scope of the High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor Market Report

Report attribute Details
Market size available for years 2022 – 2030
Base year considered 2021
Historical data 2018 – 2021
Forecast period 2022 – 2030
Quantitative units Revenue in USD Million and CAGR from 2022 to 2030
Segments Covered Types, applications, end users, and more.
Report cover Revenue Forecast, Business Ranking, Competitive Landscape, Growth Factors and Trends
Regional scope North America, Europe, Asia-Pacific, Latin America, Middle East and Africa
Scope of customization Free report customization (equivalent to up to 8 analyst business days) with purchase. Added or changed country, region and segment scope.
Pricing and purchase options Take advantage of personalized purchasing options to meet your exact research needs. Explore purchase options

Regional analysis of the High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor Market can be represented as follows:

This part of the report assesses key regional and country-level markets on the basis of market size by type and application, key players, and market forecast.

Based on Geography, the Global High Affinity Nerve Growth Factor Receptor Market has been segmented as follows:

    • North America includes the United States, Canada and Mexico
    • Europe includes Germany, France, UK, Italy, Spain
    • South America includes Colombia, Argentina, Nigeria and Chile
    • Asia Pacific includes Japan, China, Korea, India, Saudi Arabia and Southeast Asia

For more information or query or customization before buying, visit @ https://www.marketresearchintellect.com/product/high-affinity-nerve-growth-factor-receiver-market-size-and-forecast/

About Us: Market Research Intellect

Market Research Intellect provides syndicated and customized research reports to clients from various industries and organizations, in addition to the goal of providing customized and in-depth research studies. range of industries including energy, technology, manufacturing and construction, chemicals and materials, food and beverage. Etc. Our research studies help our clients to make decisions based on higher data, to admit deep forecasts, to grossly capitalize with opportunities and to optimize efficiency by activating as their belt in crime to adopt a mention precise and essential without compromise. clients, we have provided expert behavior assertion research facilities to more than 100 Global Fortune 500 companies such as Amazon, Dell, IBM, Shell, Exxon Mobil, General Electric, Siemens, Microsoft, Sony and Hitachi.

Contact us:
Mr. Edwyne Fernandes
USA: +1 (650)-781-4080
UK: +44 (753)-715-0008
APAC: +61 (488)-85-9400
US toll free: +1 (800)-782-1768

Website: –https://www.marketresearchintellect.com/

Small rural restaurants in WA left behind by SBA relief program

0

The funds were intended to cover expenses incurred during the pandemic, but thousands of businesses are still awash in debt.

Nationally, only about a third of qualified applicants have received a portion of the $28.6 billion in federal relief grants. Almost 40% of that went to only 5% of applicants. Days after the app opened last summer, business owners asked over $72 billion — approximately 2½ times the amount of funds available.

The Washington Hospitality Association estimates that at least 3,335 restaurants across the state have closed between January 2020 and May 2021. The association’s president and CEO, Anthony Anton, said he expects another wave of closures if these restaurants do not receive financial support. Statewide, he said, nearly 4,000 businesses applied and qualified for the grant but received nothing. Many could be forced to close.

“They submitted, they went through the process, we know how well they qualified,” Anton said. “Let’s fund those. That’s what I hope will happen.


This story is part of Crosscut’s WA Recovery Watch, an investigative project tracking federal dollars in Washington State.


The SBA initially priority grants to self-identified restaurant owners of color, as well as majority women- and veteran-owned businesses, giving those candidates a 21-day head start. Despite these efforts, the six largest grants in Washington have gone to business owners from non-priority groups. Millions more went to chains and franchises.

White male business owners in Texas and Tennessee also suedalleging priority timelines were discriminatory, later causing the SBA to revoke thousands of grants previously given to priority restaurants.

“Those [priority applicants] was put back in the pile and did not proportionally get the same amount of money back. It is heartbreaking to hear these stories,” Anton said. “I spoke to several of these people who thought they were going to make it and then had their hearts broken a second time.”

There’s a silver lining for the future of restaurants: The Restaurant Revitalization Fund grant program could get a new influx of money.

On April 7, the US House of Representatives voted to allocate $42 billion to replenish the Restaurant Revitalization Fund, and it is now awaiting a Senate vote. If passed, it would provide funding to all initial applicants in the first round, plus an additional $13 billion for struggling businesses. At least 90,000 restaurants and bars across the country have closed since the pandemic hit two years ago, said the bill’s main sponsor, U.S. Representative Earl Blumenauer, D-Oregon, and U.S. Representative Dean Phillips, D-Minnesota.

“It would mean the world to them,” Anton said, “to see Congress step in, do the right thing, and help them.”

NAHCO Plc shares post over 40% shareholder return in one month

0

Within a month, the share price of airline NAHCO Plc appreciated by 42.50% to close at 5.70 naira per share, bringing the market capitalization to 9.26 billion naira.

The growth in share price that has been recorded by the company can be attributed to the impressive audited financial performance reported recently for the period ended December 31, 2021.

Additionally, the company’s shares have improved on investor dividends and anticipation of bonus issues, as reported earlier this month.

Consequently, the rally in the company’s shares led to a gain of 2.76 billion naira in market capitalization at the close of trading activities on the Nigerian Stock Exchange.

  • Shares of the listed company grew from N4.00 per share on March 14, 2022 to N5.70 per share on April 14, 2022, representing growth of 42.50%, or N1.70 in monetary terms.
  • The purchase interest recorded on shares of NAHCO Plc positively impacted the company’s market capitalization from N6.50 billion to N9.26 billion at the end of the day’s trading activities, bringing the gains to 2.76 billion naira.
  • Shares in the company have gained 52.41% year-to-date, starting the year at 3.74 Naira and are currently trading at 5.70 Naira.
  • Shares of the company are currently trading 2.56% below their 52-week high at N5.85. However, the company’s shares generated gains of around 183.58% for investors who bought them at their 52-week low trading price of N2.10 per share.

What you should know

  • As disclosed in the company’s audited financial results for the year ended December 31, 2021, a dividend of N041,000 per share, amounting to N665 million, compared to N203 million paid in 2020, has been proposed. at the meeting of the board of directors held on March 29, 2022. and subject to the approval of the annual general meeting.
  • The directors of the company have recommended a script issuance of (1) share unit for every five (5) share units held by existing shareholders in the form of fully paid shares in the amount of N162 million ( gross of withholding tax) to be capitalized from earnings deductions.
  • NAHCO Plc has released its 2021 audited financial results for the period ended December 31, 2021, reporting profit of N772 million, representing year-on-year growth of 155.39%. Revenue of N10.23 billion was recorded for the full year, compared to N7.13 billion in the same period of 2020.
  • Earnings per share were recorded as N0.46 kobo compared to N0.18 kobo recorded during the corresponding period of 2020. Subscribe to the Nairametrics Stock Select newsletter to view our stock selection.

Missouri State Highway Patrol reports 4 arrests Friday, April 15

Highway Patrol reports the arrest of several people in area counties on April 15and.

Anguelica Franco, 21, of Kansas City, and Matthew Menchaca, 26, of Hammond, Indiana, were arrested in Linn County in the morning. Each was charged with possession of less than 10 grams of marijuana, possession of drug paraphernalia and speeding. Both were released.

James Lewis, 42, of Kansas City, was arrested in Harrison County in the afternoon. He was charged with exceeding the posted speed limit of 18 miles per hour and driving while intoxicated. Lewis was taken to the Harrison County Law Enforcement Center for 12 hours.

The patrol also arrested Chase Burkhart, 24, of Warrensburg in Caldwell County in the afternoon. He was accused of displaying another’s license plates and driving a vehicle without financial responsibility. An arrest report says he also had Maryville public safety warrants for failure to appear for allegedly failing to register a motor vehicle and failing to hold financial responsibility. Burkhart was taken to the Caldwell County Detention Center and Patrol notes he was bailable.

Highway Patrol arrested two residents of the Green Hills Counties area on Friday evening April 15and.

Cody Henderson, 34, of Hamilton, was arrested in Caldwell County. He was charged with drunk driving as a former offender and speeding. He was taken to Caldwell County Detention Center for 24 hours.

Rachel Lasher, 37, of Green City, was arrested in Sullivan County. She was charged with driving while intoxicated, having no insurance and failing to maintain the right half of the roadway. She was taken to the Sullivan County Sheriff’s Office and released.



Post views:
704

X Factor Rhydian Roberts’ transformation and heartbreaking life 15 years after the ITV show

0

Rhydian Roberts is one of the most famous X Factor contestants.

The baritone singer shot to fame in 2007 on season 4 of the popular ITV show. Rhydian’s unique style and distinctive platinum blonde look captivated the judges as he sailed to the live shows when mentored by Dannii Minogue.

Rhydian was 24 when he appeared on the program and faced stiff competition from actors such as Same Difference and Niki Evans. The opera singer progressed to the final as fans raved about his lyrical renditions of songs such as Go West and Get The Party Started.

READ MORE:ITV X Factor retirement Rebecca Ferguson, famous ex and life 12 years after the show

Rhydian eventually finished in second place behind Leon Jackson, but was still offered a recording contract by Simon Cowell’s label, Syco Music. The musician described his journey on the program as a “whirlwind” – as reported by Mirror Online.

He said, “I had a great time. I was surprised I even made it to the bottom two because of the nature of the voice. It’s really a pop show.”

Rhydian’s career went from strength to strength following his time on X Factor as he released his self-titled debut album in November 2008. The album achieved platinum status within weeks and earned him the title of Artist best-selling male solo of the year with 600,000 copies. sold.

He performed for an audience of over 30,000 at Andrew Lloyd Webber’s 60th birthday party in Hyde Park and Prince Charles invited him to become a patron of the Prince’s Trust. After touring, Rhydian released his second album ‘O Fortuna’ and recorded his own special for Welsh broadcaster S4C, followed by the documentary ‘Rhydian’.

After releasing two classic crossover albums, Rhydian decided to change his sound for his 2011 album “Waves”. Rhydian joined the cast of the West End musical We Will Rock You in 2011, appeared in the pantomime Aladdin, the Rocky Horror Show and touring productions of Jesus Christ Superstar and Little Shop of Horrors.

Rhydian was working as a personal trainer when he auditioned for the X Factor – and he continued to work on his physique as he showed off his ripped transformation in a photo shoot in 2015. However, Rhydian has opened up in the past about the how he struggled with his body image.



Rhydian Roberts shows off her ripped transformation on stage

He told Loose Women in 2018: “I had it in college. I guess you would call it body dysmorphia. I don’t have it now, but when you’re on TV there’s always pressure to look good.

“The same is true with men too. I don’t have it bad at all. When I was muscular, you’re never tall enough or thin enough, whatever. It’s not that important now and the older you get, the more tolerant you are.”

Rhydian is now 39 and has moved away from the stage in recent years and now works away from the limelight. He describes himself as an “X Factor legend” in his Twitter bio and also reveals that he works for an entertainment management company.

His new role is that of manager of artists and promoter for the stars, including Any Dream Will Do winner Lee Mead, Iranian-Canadian West End actor Rami Karimloo, actress Samantha Barks and the pop group UB40. Rhydian is keeping busy as he has also stated that he is a real estate developer and investor.

Away from his showbiz career, Rhydian has been in a relationship with his girlfriend, Liesl, since 2016 and revealed he has become a stepfather to his son.

He said in 2018: “He doesn’t have a dad basically so I stepped in and played the role. I love it, you have to become completely selfless. Seeing his development is just beautiful to see. It makes me hate to sing. I’m practicing at home and he’s like, ‘daddy, daddy, stop singing’.”

Receive newsletters with the biggest and latest TV and showbiz news by signing up here

Biden increases oil royalty rate and cuts lease sales | Montana News

0

By MATTHEW BROWN, Associated Press

BILLINGS, Mont. (AP) – The Interior Department said Friday it was moving forward with the first onshore sales of public oil and natural gas drilling leases under President Joe Biden, but would increase sharply royalty rates for businesses as federal officials weigh efforts to fight climate change against pressure to bring down high gas prices.

The royalty rate for new leases will increase from 12.5% ​​to 18.75%. That’s a 50% jump and the first royalty increase for the federal government since they were imposed in the 1920s.

Biden suspended the new lease just a week after taking office in January 2021. A federal judge in Louisiana ordered sales to resume, saying Interior officials had offered no ‘rational explanation’ for canceling them .

The government held an auction of offshore leases in the Gulf of Mexico in November, although a court later blocked the sale before the leases were issued.

political cartoons

Friday’s announcement comes as Biden is under pressure to increase U.S. crude output as the pandemic and war in Ukraine upend the global economy and fuel prices have soared. The Democrat is facing calls from within his own party to do more to reduce emissions from the fossil fuels that are causing climate change.

Leases for 225 square miles (580 square kilometers) of federal land mostly in the West will be offered for sale in a notice to be released Monday, officials said. The plots are about 30% less land than authorities had offered for sale in November and 80% less than originally nominated by industry.

Interior Department officials declined to specify which states would have land for sale or give a breakdown of the amount of land by state, saying that information would be included in Monday’s sale notices. They said the reduced area offered reflects a focus on leasing in locations close to existing oil and gas development, including pipelines.

Hundreds of plots of public land that companies have designated for leasing had already been withdrawn from the upcoming lease sale due to fears that wildlife could be harmed by drilling rigs.

At the time, officials said burning fuel from remaining leases could cost billions of dollars in climate change impacts. Fossil fuels mined from public lands account for about 20% of energy-related greenhouse gas emissions in the United States, making it a prime target for climate activists who want to end leasing.

Republicans want more drilling, saying it would increase US energy independence and help lower the cost of crude. But oil companies have been reluctant to expand drilling due to uncertainty over how long high prices will continue.

Friday’s announcement comes after Interior officials raised the prospect of higher royalty rates and less land available for drilling in a leasing reform report released last year.

“For too long, federal oil and gas leasing programs have prioritized the needs of extractive industries,” Secretary Deb Haaland said. “Today we begin to reset how and what we consider the highest and best use of American resources.”

But the move was condemned on both sides of the political spectrum: environmentalists derided the decision to suspend long-delayed sales, while oil industry officials said higher royalty rates would deter drilling.

Nicole Ghio, of environmental group Friends of the Earth, said Biden is putting the profits of the oil industry ahead of future generations who will have to deal with the worsening consequences of climate change.

“If Biden wants to be a climate leader, he needs to stop auctioning off our public lands to Big Oil,” Ghio said in an emailed statement.

American Petroleum Institute Vice President Frank Macchiarola said officials had removed some of the most important plots that companies wanted to drill while adding “new barriers” that would discourage companies from investing in drilling on public lands.

Lease sales and the royalties companies pay on extracted oil and gas have brought in more than $83 billion in revenue over the past decade. Half of the money from onshore drilling goes to the state where it happened.

Most states and many private landowners require companies to pay royalty rates above 12.5%, with some states charging 20% ​​or more, according to federal officials.

The royalty rate for oil produced from federal reserves in the deep waters of the Gulf of Mexico is 18.75%. In the November auction which was later canceled, energy companies including Shell, BP, Chevron and ExxonMobil bid a total of $192 million for offshore drilling rights in the Gulf.

The new leases that are being developed could continue to produce crude well beyond 2030, when Biden has set a goal of reducing greenhouse gas emissions by at least 50%, compared to 2005 levels. The scientists say the world must be on track towards this goal over the next decade to avoid catastrophic climate change.

Economists say a higher royalty rate would have a relatively small effect on global emissions, as any reduction in oil and gas from federal lands would be more than offset by fuel from other sources.

Follow Matthew Brown on Twitter: @matthewbrownAP

Copyright 2022 The Associated Press. All rights reserved. This material may not be published, broadcast, rewritten or redistributed.

United Way’s annual golf outing returns on June 3

0

The annual United Way of Fayette County golf outing is scheduled for Friday, June 3 at Greens Golf Club on State Route 41 SW in Washington CH

Debbie Bryant, President of United Way of Fayette County, explained, “This is usually our biggest fundraising event of the year, and we hope you’ll join us for a fun day of golf.

Lunch will be served at 11 a.m. and golf starting at noon. The cost is $200 per team. Register at the outlet by calling the United Way office at 740-335-8932 or going online at www.unitedwayfayco.org.

In addition, there will be several raffle/silent auction items this year and prizes for the longest ride, closest to the hairpin.

Bryant wrote via email, “As we recover from a pandemic that has crippled us all, the need is greater than ever to help Fayette County residents with health, education and financial stability. As we all try to bounce back, United Way of Fayette County depends on your help as we strive to support 21 local programs and agencies.

“Your participation will help Fayette County seniors get a hot meal, young people find a place to go after school, the homeless find a warm bed, and much more. We are also an affiliate of the Dolly Parton Imagination Library with approximately 850 Fayette County children currently enrolled in the program Literacy remains one of our initiatives.

Creating lasting change in Fayette County since 1951, United Way of Fayette County’s mission is to unite the community to improve people’s lives.

Today, the nonprofit partners with 30 Fayette County health and social service agencies to ensure that all people have full and comprehensive access to services that will help them develop their greatest potential.

For more information or to follow United Way of Fayette County news, visit www.unitedwayfayco.org/ or the United Way Facebook page, “United Way of Fayette County, Inc.”

How to save for a family vacation

Financial literacy is an essential life skill needed to make informed decisions about budgeting, borrowing and more. Armed with this knowledge, children grow up prepared for financial independence.

Teaching children and teens financial literacy often falls on parents, and it’s not always easy. You need to both keep your teen involved and interested and make the process fun. One way is to take advantage of interesting occasions, such as holidays, to teach your children good saving habits.

Set goals for yourself and your children

So you’re going on vacation. It’s time to set goals.

Decide where you are going

First, decide where you are going. Use selecting a destination as an opportunity to get your kids talking about where they want to go and to build excitement. Choose a location together and let your kids know that the trip can only happen if they contribute financially.

Determine costs

Whether your family is planning a trip to Disneyland or a vacation to your kids’ favorite place, it’s time to figure out the costs.

Involve your children in the process. Break down the numbers for transportation, accommodation, entertainment and other expenses. Show the total to your children and discuss how they will help you save this amount.

Define a timeline

Saving is a task, and that task needs a deadline. Discuss with your children the date of the holidays and agree on the date by which you must reach your savings goal.

Once the deadline is set, you can move on to the most important part: growing your vacation fund.

How to build your savings

Let’s be honest: saving money is rarely fun. Nevertheless, you should keep the process engaging for your children and involve them as much as possible.

Here’s what you can do.

Make a family budget together

With your common goal in mind, sit down with your kids and create a family budget. Show them how much money is coming in and how much you spend on a regular basis. Give them the opportunity to discuss categories of expenses that can be reduced to increase savings.

Grocery shopping together

Take your kids shopping. Tell them that every dollar they can save at the store will go towards the vacation fund. This way they can learn to pay attention to prices. Will that money go towards candy or their dream trip? Let them prioritize.

do your part

Your vacation fund should be a team effort, so show your kids you’re working hard to save too.

Let them know which of your expenses you have limited. Negotiate lower rates on your monthly bills and share with your family how much it can save them. Lead by example.

Reduce your daily expenses

Keep teaching your children to prioritize saving. If they want a new toy, remind them of their goal. Or, see if they can part with some entertainment subscriptions, for example, to get more vacation time. Do they want Disney+ or an extra day at Disneyland?

Track progress

Keep an eye on progress and make sure your kids are too. This task can be easy if you have the right tools.

Greenlight, a debit card designed for kids that lets you set savings goals and track spending. As a parent, you’ll receive real-time alerts whenever the card is used, as well as access to historical account activity.

How Greenlight can be a resource

Greenlight can be a great tool to help teach financial literacy to your children. The card comes with an app to manage it, with different experiences for parents and children.

The card lets kids create savings budgets and goals, monitor balances, receive money from family and friends and more. And as a parent, you can track your children’s card usage, set store and cash withdrawal limits, and block or unblock the card if needed. Another cool feature is the ability to pay your kids for chores and set up an allowance schedule.

Greenlight costs $4.99 per month for up to five children. The card also charges no overseas transaction fees, meaning your kids can take their card on vacation abroad and use it without worrying about hidden costs. Greenlight also does not charge any ATM or overdraft fees.

Greenlight can benefit both you and your children. As your kids learn the basics of spending and saving with the card, you can keep an eye on their progress and guide them through the process.

The bottom line

Teaching children financial literacy is no small feat. One of the best strategies is to create a sense that your child or teen is in charge of the family finances and allow them to set goals that they are eager to work towards.

A family vacation can be one of those goals. Engage your kids in the savings process and help them learn the basics of budgeting and prioritizing expenses as you go. This way, they can begin to understand financial responsibility, while hoping for something fun and rewarding.

Tools like Greenlight can help you and your kids stay on track and deepen your kids’ financial education. With this debit card designed for kids, they can learn the basics of using a debit card, monitor their spending, and stay on track to reach their goals.

Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract Market Growth Factor with Regional Forecast, Market Size, Key Vendors, Industry Research and End User Analysis by 2028

0

Global Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract Market The 2022 Research Report presents a professional and comprehensive analysis of the global Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market in the current situation. This report includes development plans and policies as well as manufacturing processes and price structures of Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract. 2022 Research Report provides an analytical view of the industry by studying different factors such as the Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market growth, consumption volume, market size, revenue, market share, market trends, and cost structures of the Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract industry over the forecast period from 2022 to 2028. It includes in-depth research of the Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market status and competitive landscape global. This report analyzes the Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market potential in the present and future prospect in detail from different angles.

To understand how our report can make a difference to your business strategy, request a sample PDF report: https://www.stratagemmarketinsights.com/sample/107201

The Global Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market report is provided for the international markets as well as development trends, competitive landscape analysis, and key regions development status. Development policies and plans are discussed as well as manufacturing processes and cost structures are also analyzed. This report also indicates import/export consumption, supply and demand Figures, cost, price, revenue and gross margins. The Global Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market 2021 research provides a basic overview of the industry including definitions, classifications, applications and industry chain structure.

The report also provides a 360 degree overview of the competitive landscape of industries that are

NutriHerb, The Good Scents Company, Xian Yuensun Biological Technology, Xi’an Tianrui, BOVLIN, Andy Biotech, Meihe, Runyu-herb, Naturalin.

Key Market Segmentation:

Stratagem Market Insights provides analysis of key trends in each sub-segment of the global Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market, as well as forecasts at the global, regional and country level from 2022 to 2028. Our report has categorized the market based on type, offer, technology, system and end-use industry. The biggest strength of the report is to provide companies in the sector with a strategic analysis of the impact of COVID-19. At the same time, this report analyzes the market of the top 20 countries and presents the market potential of these countries.

Geographically, the detailed analysis of consumption, revenue, market share and growth rate of the following regions:

➳ North America (United States, Canada, Mexico)
➳ European (Germany, United Kingdom, France, Italy, Spain, Others)
➳ Asia-Pacific (China, Japan, India, South Korea, Southeast Asia, Others)
➳ The Middle East and Africa (Saudi Arabia, United Arab Emirates, South Africa, Others)
➳ South America (Brazil, Others)

>>> Our mission is not only to provide advice, but also to support you with factual information. We offer you a wide range of information and support you in the transformation of your business

The report also focuses on global major major industry players of Global Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract Market Share providing information such as company profiles, product picture, specification, capacity, production , price, cost, revenue and contact details. Upstream raw materials and equipment and downstream demand analysis are also carried out.

Global Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract Market development strategy before and after COVID-19, by analysis of company strategy, landscape, type, application and 20 main countries covers and analyzes the potential of the global extract industry extract of Gynostemma Pentaphyllum, providing statistical information on market dynamics, growth factors, key challenges, PEST analysis and Market Entry Strategy Analysis, Opportunities and Forecast.

Valuable Points from Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract Market Research Report 2022-2028:

➼ Significant changes in market dynamics.
➼ Reports and assessment of recent industry developments.
➼ A comprehensive background analysis, which includes an assessment of the Parental Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market.
➼ Current, historical, and projected size of the Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market from the perspective of both value and volume.
➼ Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract Market segmentation by major regions.
➼ Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract Market shares and strategies by key manufacturers.
➼ Specific and regional emerging segments for the Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market.
➼ An objective assessment of the trajectory of the Market.
➼ Recommendations to Top Companies to strengthen their presence in the market.

FAQs

[1] Who are the global Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract manufacturers, what is their share, price, volume, competitive landscape, SWOT analysis and future growth plans?

[2] What are the key drivers, growth/restriction factors and challenges of Gynostemma Pentaphyllum extract?

[3] How is the Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract industry expected to grow during the projected period?

[4] How has COVID-19 affected the Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract industry and is there any change under the regulatory policy scope?

[5] What are the major application areas and product types of Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract industry that can expect huge demand during the forecast period?

[6] What are the key offerings and new strategies adopted by Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract players?

Get full report in your inbox within 24 hours now @ https://www.stratagemmarketinsights.com/cart/107201

In conclusion, the Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract market report presents the descriptive analysis of the parent market supported elite players, present, past and artistic movement information that is able to function as a guide profitable for all business competitors in the Gynostemma Pentaphyllum Extract industry. Our team of expert research analysts have been trained to provide in-depth marketing research reports on each individual industry, which can be helpful in knowing the industry data in the most accurate way.

Contact us:

Mr Shah
Stratagem Market Overview
Tel: US +1 415 871 0703 / JAPAN +81-50-5539-1737
Email: [email protected]

A J

The Bank of Canada raises its key rate to 1%

0

The Bank of Canada raised its benchmark interest rate by half a percentage point to 1% on Wednesday in its latest move to contain high inflation.

The bank interest rate affects Canadian businesses and consumers by affecting the rates they pay and receive on things like mortgages, GICs and savings accounts.

The bank cut its rate to barely above zero in March 2020 when the pandemic began.

  • Wondering what rising interest rates mean for your finances? Email [email protected] with your questions or join us live in the comments now.

While the move helped the economy ride out the unprecedented uncertainty of COVID-19, in recent months inflation has returned to its highest level in decades, prompting the central bank to start unwinding all that credit. cheap.

“Inflation is too high,” Bank of Canada Governor Tiff Macklem said at a news conference announcing the news. “We need higher interest rates.”

WATCH | Bank of Canada Governor Tiff Macklem explains the need to reduce inflation:

War in Ukraine contributes to inflation, says Bank of Canada Governor

Bank of Canada Governor Tiff Macklem said the war in Ukraine is one of the reasons why Canada is experiencing higher inflation. 1:46

It’s the second time in as many months the bank has raised its rate, and as such Wednesday’s move is both the bank’s first consecutive rate hike since 2017, as well as its biggest single hike. since the year 2000.

Economists expected this change, and with inflation flirting with 6%, they expect more to happen, at least until the central bank rate hits 2% – and maybe beyond.

Sell ​​bonds too

Raising rates isn’t the only thing the bank is doing to remove stimulus from the economy,

Earlier, during the pandemic, the bank launched a bond-buying program to keep money flowing and reduce borrowing costs. Known as “quantitative easing”, the bank has been signaling for some time that the bond-buying program may be coming to an end, and on Wednesday the bank announced that it is now moving in the opposite direction, getting rid of all these obligations on its books as they expire.

“Maturing Government of Canada bonds on the bank’s balance sheet will no longer be replaced and as a result the size of the balance sheet will shrink over time,” the bank said.

This will increase the cost of borrowing, because removing the central bank as the guaranteed buyer of all these bonds will force those who issue them to have to pay a higher rate to borrow money.

These rates were on the rise even before the bank’s decision. The yield on a five-year bond rose above 2.7% this week, the highest rate since 2013. Just a month ago it was below 1.5%, and at some point earlier in the pandemic, it bottomed out below 0.5%. hundred.

The bank’s decision to implement a “quantitative tightening” program will drive these yields even higher, making fixed-rate mortgages more expensive.

Variable rate loans, on the other hand, are pegged to the bank’s rate, so they too will likely rise before the end of the day.

Harder to buy

Anyone receiving a fixed rate loan is immune higher rates for now because it has stopped, but a larger impact of this rate increase will affect first-time buyers because higher rates will raise the bar for the stress test that calculates how much they are allowed to borrow.

The mortgage broker Leah Zlatkin of Lowestrates.ca says the exact amount will depend on the situation of the people, but in general, each movement of 25 points bank rate results in a loss of about $ 12,000 in purchasing power. Wednesday’s 50 point hike is double that.

“Because of this, people are in for a little less money than before,” she said in an interview.

Bruce Sellery says the rate is bad news for anyone in debt, but it will ultimately be worth it to get inflation under control. (Craig Chivers / Radio Canada)

Changes of bank rates tend to affect the housing market in a negative way, but they also have a positive impact on the other side of the ledger for many households. That’s part of why, for consumers, rate hikes are “both good and bad,” according to Bruce Sellery, CEO of Credit Canada Debt Solutions.

“They are bad in that it will cost more to borrow money, but they are good in that they are the action that a central bank can take to try to control inflation “, he told CBC News in an interview.

The inflation rate in Canada was 5.7% last month, and the price of everything from food to housing through gasoline increases its fastest pace in decades. “Something needs to be done so that we’re not paying these ridiculous prices for things,” Sellery said.

How Michiganders can budget amid record inflation

0

LANSING, Mich. (WILX) – From groceries to gas, prices are on the rise across the board.

The United States Department of Labor announced on Tuesday that inflation hit a 40-year high in March, up 8.5% from 12 months earlier. This is the largest year-over-year increase since 1981.

The price of eggs has nearly tripled from this time last year, while other foods jumped around 9% in March alone.

As prices go up, chances are your salary hasn’t gone up as well.

More and more people are crunching the numbers and trying to figure out how to fit everything they need into their budget. What may have covered your grocery bill in 2021 may not be getting you half of what’s on your list now.

As people continue to recover from the COVID pandemic and deal with inflation, there is a new sense of urgency when it comes to budgeting.

“I have a newborn and the formula has grown a lot,” said Anthony Bell. “I also noticed that a lot of things are out of stock.”

Related: Michigan parents are struggling to feed their babies due to formula shortages

Bell tries to support his family in the midst of the inflation crisis. He is not alone. Mark King, a Lansing financial adviser, said many people are adjusting to the increase.

“One thing that’s happened during the pandemic is that there’s been a lot of money given out,” King said. “Now that that money is gone, people are seeing the effects of refund credits and child tax credits and that’s what’s really affecting household budgets.”

With higher demand for goods, prices rise. Even getting to the grocery store costs a pretty penny. According to AAA, Michiganders spent an average of $2.79 a gallon on gasoline in April 2021. A year later, people are left with prices over a dollar higher.

Lily: AAA: Michigan gas prices hit seven-year high; here’s why

“When you’re fueling up, think about your itinerary for the week,” suggests King. “Try to plan your trips to the grocery store, to the laundry — all of your errands along your route to help save gas.”

King also said you should think twice before hitting their favorite burger.

“The pandemic has made us a bit lazy. We ordered, we ordered a lot,” King said. “We did Door Dash and we used the convenience of those services. We need to get back to normal life. This is what must happen.

Another tip for planning for the coming months is to add more to your rainy day fund when you can and remove any monthly subscriptions or subscriptions you have but don’t use often.

According to a Nielsen survey, 42% of respondents said they don’t use a streaming service enough to make it worth the cost.

Related: Gas prices

Copyright 2022 WILX. All rights reserved.

Subscribe to our News Newsletter 10 and get the latest local news and weather straight to your email every morning.

Diabetes Devices Market Revenue Will Hit $73.4 Billion By

0

ALBANY, NY, April 11, 2022 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — The diabetes devices market is expected to grow at a CAGR of 6.4% during the forecast period of 2019 to 2027. Growing demand for minimally invasive devices for diagnosing and monitoring blood sugar The number of diabetes patients is fueling the growth of the diabetes devices market.

Factors such as lifestyle change, malnutrition and genetic mutations are associated with the predicted increasing prevalence of diabetes worldwide. According to various public and private institutions specializing in diabetes, diabetes is considered one of the major killer diseases. For example, according to the American Diabetes Association, nearly 71,000 deaths each year in the United States are associated with diabetes. This creates a demand for diabetes management devices and thus drives the growth of the diabetes devices market.

According to published data, diabetes affects millions of people each year worldwide. This leads to substantial efforts for the development of technologically advanced devices, and thus indicates new growth frontiers of the diabetes device market.

Request Diabetes Devices Market Research Report Brochure – https://www.transparencymarketresearch.com/sample/sample.php?flag=B&rep_id=14

Diabetes Devices Market – Key Findings of the Report

  • The rapid increase in the geriatric population, which accounts for a large percentage of diabetics, is fueling the demand for the diabetes device market. According to the World Health Organization, by 2050, the geriatric population in the world is estimated at 2 billion (22% of the world’s population) compared to 900 million in 2015.
  • Statistics on the high prevalence of diabetes among the geriatric population in developed economies, where this demographic group spends heavily on healthcare, is driving the diabetes device market. According to the American Diabetes Association, in the United States, more than 25% of diabetic patients are 65 years of age or older.
  • Diabetes is gradually increasing in the pediatric population, which is expected to increase the demand for diabetes devices
  • Glucose monitoring devices held the major share of the diabetes devices market in 2018 and are expected to continue to dominate during the forecast period. Glucose monitoring devices with advanced sensors are widely available and are used for detecting blood sugar levels.
  • The practice of using wireless technology for continuous glucose monitoring (CGM) of type 1 diabetes patients to transmit interstitial fluid glucose readings between patient skin cells is driving the device market for diabetes
  • Hospital pharmacy is expected to be the most attractive distribution channel segment in the diabetes device market. The high prevalence of type 1 and type 2 diabetes, which accounts for a high volume of hospital visits, and increasing investment in R&D for the artificial pancreas system are fueling the growth of the hospital pharmacy segment of the diabetes devices market
  • North America is a leading region in the diabetes device market. The substantial expenditure on diabetes care devices by the large population with diabetes, the availability of advanced technologies, and the role of public health services in the United States and Canada in raising awareness of diabetes management are fueling the growth of the market for diabetes devices in the region.

Demand for Analysis of Impact of COVID-19 on Diabetes Devices Market – https://www.transparencymarketresearch.com/sample/sample.php?flag=covid19&rep_id=14

Diabetes Devices Market – Growth Drivers

  • Rising demand for insulin delivery devices with type 1 diabetes considered a major health issue is propelling the diabetes device market
  • Estimation of exponential increase in diabetes prevalence due to a number of factors is driving the diabetes devices market

Get Exclusive Sample PDF Copy of Diabetes Devices Market Report – https://www.transparencymarketresearch.com/sample/sample.php?flag=S&rep_id=14

Diabetes Devices Market – Key Players

Some of the major players operating in the diabetes devices market are;

  • Medtronic
  • Sanofi
  • F. Hoffmaa-La Roche Ltd.
  • Tandem Diabetes Care Inc.
  • Cellnovo
  • LifeScan Inc.
  • Novo Nordisk A/S
  • Eli Lilly and company
  • Becton, Dickinson and company
  • Abbott Laboratories
  • Island Corporation
  • Owen Mumford Ltd.

Inquire Before You Buy – https://www.transparencymarketresearch.com/sample/sample.php?flag=EB&rep_id=14

The diabetes devices market is segmented as follows;

Global Diabetes Devices Market, By Product Type

  • Glucose monitoring devices
    • Self-monitoring blood glucose meters
    • Blood glucose test strips
    • Lancets
    • Continuous blood glucose monitoring readers
  • Insulin Delivery Devices
    • Insulin syringes
    • insulin pens
    • Insulin pumps
  • diabetes management software
  • Artificial pancreas system

Global Diabetes Devices Market, By Distribution Channel

  • Hospital pharmacies
  • Retail pharmacies
  • Online pharmacies
  • Diabetes clinics/centers

Global Diabetes Devices Market, By Region

  • North America
  • Europe
    • Germany
    • UK
    • France
    • Italy
    • Spain
    • The rest of Europe
  • Asia Pacific
    • China
    • India
    • Japan
    • Australia and New Zealand
    • Rest of Asia-Pacific
  • Latin America
    • Brazil
    • Mexico
    • Rest of Latin America
  • Middle East and Africa
    • GCC countries
    • South Africa
    • Rest of the Middle East and Africa

Modernization of healthcare in terms of infrastructure and services has pushed the healthcare industry to new heights, stay updated with Latest Health Industry Research Reports by Transparency Market Research:

Smart Diabetes Management Market: The Smart Diabetes Management Market for the Historical Period 2017-2018 and Forecast 2019-2027, Favorable Reimbursements for Digital Diabetes Management Products and Skyrocketing Adoption of state-of-the-art products are key factors likely to drive the smart diabetes management market.

Diabetes Drugs Market: Growing geriatric population across the globe is one of the major factors fueling the demand for diabetes drugs. The elderly population is very susceptible to certain health problems such as blood pressure and diabetes. This, in turn, is contributing to the growth of the diabetes drug market.

Insufficiently Controlled Type II Diabetes Treatment Market: The increasing prevalence of diabetes across the world is the major driver for the growth of the insufficiently controlled type 2 diabetes treatment market. The increase in the geriatric population and the changing lifestyle of people are also responsible for the rapid increase in the prevalence of diabetes worldwide.

About Us

Transparency Market Research is a global market intelligence company, providing global market intelligence reports and services. Our proprietary blend of quantitative forecasting and trend analysis delivers forward-looking insights to thousands of decision makers. Our experienced team of analysts, researchers and consultants use proprietary data sources and various tools and techniques to gather and analyze information.

Our data repository is continuously updated and revised by a team of research experts, so that it always reflects the latest trends and information. With broad research and analytical capability, Transparency Market Research uses rigorous primary and secondary research techniques to develop distinctive datasets and research material for trade reports.

For more information on research on leading industries, visit our YouTube channel and click subscribe for future update – https://www.youtube.com/channel/UC8e-z-g23-TdDMuODiL8BKQ

Contact

Rohit Bhisey

Transparency Market Research
state tower,
90 State Street,
Office 700,
Albany NY – 12207
United States
United States – Canada Toll Free: 866-552-3453
E-mail: [email protected]
follow us: Twitter | LinkedIn
Blog: https://tmrblog.com
Browse RP – https://www.transparencymarketresearch.com/pressrelease/diabetes-devices-market.htm

Thousands of sellers plan to boycott Etsy after fee hike news

0

When Tricia Robinson first came to Etsy in 2013, it was to help save her cat’s life.

“My cat got really sick and I was getting vet bills through the roof and couldn’t afford to pay them,” Robinson said. “So I created an illustration that was inspired by him and sold it.”

It was then that Robinson realized she could use the platform to sell more of her work and make a living from it.

But after receiving her first payment from Etsy, the Montreal artist says she was struck by the difference between her sales and the amount that was deposited into her account. It was then that she paid attention to all the costs Etsy charges sellers on the platform.

At first, she was okay with that.

Tricia Robinson has been selling her artwork on Etsy for nine years. Now she plans to boycott the website because of Etsy’s increased fees. (Radio-Canada News)

“It’s kind of become like, okay, well, I’m making money as an artist. I have access to this online marketplace. It’s pretty cool for the most part,” a- she declared.

Etsy was founded in 2005, providing an online marketplace for artists and crafters to sell handmade and vintage items as well as craft supplies. The website has attracted millions of buyers and sellers and provided a platform for artists to become entrepreneurs.

But over the years, Robinson says she began to see her margins shrink as Etsy’s grew. A policy introduced in 2019 encouraged sellers to offer free shipping on purchases over US$35 by promising to optimize these stores for US shoppers. Robinson initially refused to participate, but eventually relented when he saw his sales in the United States disappear.

Offering free shipping took away at least half of her profit margin, she said. That’s when things started to go downhill on Robinson’s platform.

“[Etsy] was this really awesome market that celebrated small, artisanal and local businesses,” Robinson said. “But they’re not like that anymore.

Now Robinson is one of thousands of sellers who said they planned to boycott the site from April 11-18 after the site announced it would raise its transaction fees by 5-6.5%.

Fee hike sparks petition

This comes after Etsy’s strong fourth quarter results beat expectations.

The announcement led Kristi Cassidy, a seamstress from Westerly, Rhode Island, to launch a petition after posting on Reddit calling for an Etsy sellers union. Cassidy told CBC News that more than 11,000 vendors plan to join the boycott.

“The message was basically asking when would this end because it’s only getting worse and I don’t think it’s going to end unless we do something about it,” she said.

The petition also lists other demands, including the ability for sellers to opt out of offsite advertising, which drives sales for which Etsy charges sellers more.

In Cassidy’s case, she says Etsy charged her $100 for a dress sale from an off-site ad.

In a statement, an Etsy spokesperson said the increased fees will help increase their investments in marketing, customer support and removal of listings that violate company policies.

“Our revised fee structure will allow us to increase our investments in each of these key areas so that we can better serve our community,” the statement said.

Tricia Robinson, a Montreal-based illustrator, used Etsy to sell her artwork. (Radio-Canada News)

Company faces pressure from shareholders to boost profits, expert says

Etsy has always had an open and honest relationship with its sellers, says University of British Columbia professor David Clough.

However, Clough says he’s grown uptight over the years.

“Since 2018, they’ve increased their fees twice, suggesting they may be trying to make a profit at the expense of their market sellers,” he said.

Etsy became a publicly traded company in 2015, which makes it susceptible to shareholder pressure.

With more than five million sellers on the site and 90 million customers, Clough says the increased transaction fees are a new way for the company to boost its bottom line.

“As they have expanded their user base, it becomes more difficult to grow their revenue by adding more users, so that forces them to look for other sources of revenue.”

Kristi Cassidy designs Gothic wedding dresses and costumes that she would sell on Etsy. She started a petition asking Etsy to reverse the planned fee increase. (Kristi Cassidy)

Etsy’s fees are consistently lower than e-commerce competitors like Amazon, which charges 8-15% on top of other fees.

Still, continuing to raise fees could jeopardize Etsy’s reputation because they stray further from the company’s original values ​​that allowed small businesses to make money, he says.

As for the boycott’s potential effect on Etsy, Clough says it could create momentum for more dialogue between the company and sellers as a collective entity.

“If they’re faced with a pushback from sellers for this increase, it makes them think twice about raising fees down the line,” he said.

Cassidy says she has not been in communication with Etsy about the petition and the boycott.

And while she isn’t counting on Etsy to reverse her fee hike, she says she’s excited to build a community of sellers who want to advocate for better compensation and company policies.

“The things we could do together seem limitless,” she said.

Vacant beachfront property in Hawaii sells for a record $33.75 million

0

Hawaii (Getty)

Hawaii’s price spike continued this week when a beachfront property on the Big Island sold for $33.75 million – a record for the region.

The Wall Street Journal reports that the vacant 3.7-acre lot in the gated Kaupulehu neighborhood comes with plans for an 18,600-square-foot Paul McClean-designed mansion that includes a free-standing guesthouse and swimming pool.

The property was purchased by an LLC related to Bay Area investor John Warren and his wife, Stephanie Warren, according to the report, and the seller is a company related to commercial real estate developer Carl Panattoni, the founder of Panattoni Development.

Listing agent Carrie Nicholson of Hawai’i Life told the newspaper that Panattoni bought the three adjoining lots on the island’s west coast for a total of $24.5 million between 2006 and 2007. After hiring l Californian architect McClean to design a house for him there. , he then decided to spend more time at his home in Florida.

Or, it could just be a good time to sellwhile Hawaii becomes the favorite place for billionaires to settle.

Wall Street and tech icons, including Facebook founder Mark Zuckerberg, eBay founder Pierre Omidyar, Salesforce architect Marc Benioff, Starbucks honcho Howard Schultz, Amazon launcher Jeff Bezos and venture capitalist Peter Theil are now all full-time residents of Aloha State – where sales of properties costing $10 million or more have increased six-fold over the past year.

The big moves of the big players have come despite the local government of the 50th state offering no financial incentive for such a move – instead relying on the islands’ natural beauty, year-round good weather and the distance from the mainland, which confers a certain intimacy to those who live there.

The previous sales record for the state’s eponymous large island was a $30 million deal for a much larger stretch of land – 130 acres – in 2006, according to the report.

[Wall Street Journal] — Vince DiMiceli

DAVE RAMSEY: I wouldn’t go that far | Business

Dear Dave: Our son is in high school and he has a part-time job. He has good grades and we have always tried to teach him how to save and manage his money according to your advice. He even managed to set aside a few thousand dollars for college. My wife and I were talking the other night, and I broached the idea of ​​charging her a little rent, maybe just $20 or $25 a month, to help her be even better prepared for the world. real. What do you think of that?

Dear Keith: I appreciate the fact that you are looking for teachable moments. But making a high school student pay rent? No, that’s a bit of an exaggeration.

Listen, you and your wife already have a head start on a lot of parents. Teaching him financial responsibility and the importance of education are great things. It sounds like your son is also a bright and motivated young man.

I talk to adults all the time who are decades older, but who still don’t grasp the concepts of maturity and responsibility like this kid already does. With the kind of start you’re giving him, I think he’s going to be a very successful adult. Keep up the good work and let this young man know how proud you both are of him!

Dear Dave: I own a small business. How much should I have in a business emergency fund when my annual sales are around $100,000? Currently, I have two months of expenses aside.

Dear Therese: In general, I like the idea of ​​small businesses having about six months of expenses in hand. This type of cushion usually eliminates the need to borrow money. It also offers peace of mind. And if you’ve been an entrepreneur for a really long time, you know that’s invaluable.

Having a personal emergency fund set aside is a little different from having one for your business. When it comes to personal finances, I recommend setting aside three to six months of expenses. The basic idea is the same, however. A fully funded emergency fund gives you an option, besides debt, when unexpected events happen!

Dave Ramsey is a personal finance expert and host of The Ramsey Show.

Shortage of taxis ‘factor’ in nighttime unrest as injured man still recovers – Armagh I

0



One of the biggest taxi companies in Portadown and Lurgan said the shortage of taxis, particularly at weekends, increased the likelihood of fights and anti-social behaviour.

Fonacab, which bought up a number of local companies in 2019, and other industry representatives have twice submitted a report to the Ministry of Infrastructure outlining their concerns.

There were a number of assaults over the weekend, including one at Portadown last October which tragically resulted in the death of 22-year-old Jake Bailey-Sloan.

And a local DUP councilor has revealed how he helped a man after he was attacked in the town last summer and left with a serious head injury following an argument over a taxi.

Councilor Lavelle McIlwrath, a member of the Policing and Community Safety Partnership (PCSP), said the shortage of taxis was an issue that had been brought to his attention on several occasions.

“It’s a problem anytime you have time to go out to pubs and you have 40 or 50 young boys walking down the street, drunk in many cases,” he said. declared.

“If you have a load of taxis, there’s usually one or two sane people there, rounding them up to go home. If those cabs aren’t there, that creates a problem…and that’s where a lot of fights start.

“I’m dealing with a boy at the moment who was severely assaulted at the end of August last year.

“He is still in a rehabilitation program, after a bad cerebral hemorrhage. It was a single punch – an argument over a taxi – and a guy hit him and he fell backwards and hit his head.

“He was hospitalized for three months and in a coma for about four weeks.

“He’s going through the whole benefit system and I’m trying to get him all the help he deserves.”

Stephen Anton is head of communications at Fonacab and also lobbies the Ministry of Infrastructure on behalf of taxi operators.

He said operators have asked the department to make changes to the testing system, to make it easier to become a taxi driver and attract more to the industry.

He said: ‘We have presented to the committee twice that if you don’t have enough taxi drivers on a Saturday night when the bars are empty there will be more fights and anti-social behaviour.

“A few weeks ago a guy was stabbed in Belfast while waiting for a taxi he couldn’t get.

“You’ll also see an increase in drink-driving and illegal traffic if people can’t get home in a licensed taxi.”

He said the shortage of taxis was felt across Northern Ireland and had worsened since 2014 when a theory test was introduced for drivers.

“In 2014 there were 15,500 taxi drivers in Northern Ireland, but last year it was 8,500,” he said.

“Taxi drivers tend to be a bit older so drivers have left the industry but not enough to enter it as it is too difficult to pass the theory test.

“Over the past eight years, the average pass rate is 23% and it takes an average of 2.3 times to pass the test.

“It was made worse by Covid, when a lot of drivers left never to return.”

Fonacab has also lobbied for a rate increase, in particular to encourage more drivers to work evenings and weekends.

“As a taxi company, we don’t charge anything,” Mr Anton said. “Our income comes from the driver who pays us weekly service fees or deposit rent.

“But we can’t run a service unless we have the drivers there to do it.”

A PSNI spokesperson said: “We understand the concerns about the night economy in our cities. We continue to work with partner agencies and the hospitality industry to make our cities safe for everyone while they live, work, socialize and visit, addressing a number of factors that can impact our economy nocturnal.

“The issue of taxi availability would be handled by local providers and the Department of Infrastructure.”

This month, Infrastructure Minister Nichola Mallon announced a review of taxi fares.

A spokesperson said the department “will continue to engage with the taxi industry to update them on this progress and help them recover.”




Most read today








Clatsop County Commissioners to Vote on Strict Limits for Vacation Rentals in Beachfront Communities

0

The Clatsop County Board of Commissioners will consider two competing proposals this week, one of which would impose strict limits on where to allow vacation rental homes in unincorporated areas.

Commissioners will decide whether to restrict short-term rental licenses in residential areas to the unincorporated community of Arch Cape in the south end of the county and ban them in other non-residential areas. county incorporated.

The council will also consider a separate proposal that would revise the county’s code regulating short-term rentals in all residential areas, a step toward formally recognizing rentals that are not explicitly permitted under the existing zoning code.

The issue of short-term rentals has become a lightning rod in coastal communities. Some year-round county residents have complained that vacationers are creating a nuisance and that the proliferation of vacation homes is driving up home prices. The possibility of limiting holiday homes, meanwhile, has raised concerns among rental property owners and some business owners who fear the proposed order will deter visitors and curb lodging tax revenue. County.

Incorporated cities have their own rules for vacation rentals, so places like Astoria and Seaside would not be affected. But rental landlords in other unincorporated parts of the county would lose their short-term rental licenses upon renewal.

It’s unclear how the commission is inclined to vote on the proposals.

The seemingly contradictory proposals deal with slightly different rules, county spokesman Tom Bennett said. He said one relates to the county’s zoning code, which determines what types of buildings are allowed in different zones. The other sets operating standards for rental homes throughout the county, except for Arc Cape, for which the county has separate rules.

Residents opposed to the proliferation of vacation rentals have argued that short-term rentals should not be allowed on rural land, where the zoning code is silent on the subject. The county, however, issued short-term rental licenses in those areas, said Dan Kearns, an attorney hired to advise some Clatsop County residents on land use issues.

If the zoning ordinance limiting short-term rentals passes, it would be the latest example of a coastal community limiting vacation rentals due to concerns about livability and rising housing prices. In Lincoln County last November, voters passed a measure to phase out short-term rentals in unincorporated parts of the county over the next five years.

Late last year, the county commission imposed a temporary moratorium on new short-term rental permits. The moratorium, originally scheduled to expire in December, has now been extended until April 28.

In February, Bennett said, county commissioners asked staff to write stricter rules, but continue to allow short-term rentals in all residential areas.

After reviewing the proposal, however, the county planning commission recommended that the council only allow short-term rentals in Arch Cape.

Bennett declined to say where the county’s vacation rentals are located, citing a county ordinance that prohibits disclosing information about individual transient lodging tax revenues.

But county documents to be presented at next week’s meeting show there are 186 licensed short-term rentals in unincorporated Clatsop County. If the county commission approves the new ordinance, only 77 of those permits could be renewed.

County staff estimated this would equate to a loss of nearly $500,000 a year in lodging tax revenue.

Public comments written to council over the past two years showed broad dissatisfaction with the way the county had so far handled short-term rentals and concerns about their spread.

Some have complained that short-term tenants were crossing their property to get to the beach, littering the area and making noise late into the night.

‘Renters/vacationers have no idea what community or county rules are, and it shouldn’t be up to me to police them by calling the hotline,’ wrote county resident Terry Andrews, referring to a line residents can call to report violations. Andrews said even with such a line present, the county often doesn’t enforce the rules.

Several owners, estate agents and coastal visitors, however, have written to the commission to express their concerns about the financial losses that could result from the limitation of holiday rentals.

Linda Needham wrote that she and her husband are cleaning homes in Clatsop County and the impact of the ban on short-term rentals will further strain their finances as they try to recover from lost business during the pandemic.

Bobak Baradar, owner of a rental property in Clatsop County, said the proposal would effectively impede his ability to rent out his home.

“From our perspective, business owners and vacation rental owners are unrepresented — they’re ignoring all of us,” said Baradar, a Beaverton resident.

Some permanent residents of the coast have also expressed concern that short-term rentals are driving up housing costs and reducing the already limited supply of affordable housing for people living there full-time.

“We hear weekly, if not daily, of valuable, talented and skilled locals and their families who cannot find housing, and it breaks our hearts to see every home that sells converted into (short-term rentals) , with out-of-town corporations and businesses outbidding locals who just need a place to live,” Beth Radich, a resident of unincorporated Clatsop County, wrote to the planning commission. in March.

Baradar said he’s not buying the complaint that rental housing is eating away at housing supply for year-round residents.

“For the housing market across the United States, prices are skyrocketing and homes are selling above asking price,” he said. “They’re trying to use vacation rentals as an excuse for this, but housing prices in the United States don’t make sense.”

The commission will discuss the orders on Wednesday and likely vote on both on April 27, according to a staff report.

— Jayati Ramakrishnan

Shanghai vice mayor admits failures as Covid cases set record

0

Zong Ming praised people and frontline workers despite public criticism of tough restrictions, but said virus management needed to be improved

Shanghai’s vice mayor has admitted shortcomings in the city’s handling of its Covid-19 outbreak as a record 23,600 new cases were reported on Saturday.

Zong Ming praised the support of the people and the work of frontline workers despite public criticism of the strict restrictions, but said the handling of the virus needed to be improved.

“We feel the same way about the issues that everyone has raised and expressed,” Zong said during a daily briefing. “Much of our work has not been enough, and there is still a big gap with everyone’s expectations. We will do our best to improve. »

Beijing stepped in after Shanghai’s initial effort to isolate the virus by locking down in stages failed, insisting the country stick to its zero-tolerance policy to prevent its medical system from being overwhelmed.

Elsewhere on Saturday, the southern megacity of Guangzhou – home to more than 18 million people – said it would begin testing in its 11 districts, after cases were reported there on Friday.

In Shanghai, where 26 million people are in lockdown, residents continued to complain of food shortages due to a lack of couriers and uncertainty over when lockdown restrictions might end.

The government said it would carry out more testing on Saturday and ease some movement restrictions.

Some residents of housing complexes with no recent cases said they were told by their neighborhood committees that they could leave their homes to walk around their complexes.

This, however, did not mark a change in approach. “The epidemic prevention and control is now at the most critical moment, and we cannot tolerate any slack,” Zong said.

Gu Jun, director of the city’s commerce commission, acknowledged problems with food distribution and said distribution centers, supermarkets and pharmacies should continue to operate online as much as possible.

E-commerce company JD.com said on Saturday it had obtained a license to deliver goods to Shanghai and held a live sales session attended by more than 3.5 million people.

The products on offer sold out in seconds, and hosts repeatedly pleaded for patience in response to reviewers who complained they couldn’t buy.

  • Reuters, with additional editing by George Russell

READ MORE:

War in Ukraine and lockdowns in China cause global trade to plummet

US rushes to rethink Covid-19 jabs – NYT

Pandemic recovery in Southeast Asia faces headwinds, says AfDB

george russell

George Russell is a Hong Kong-based freelance writer and editor who has lived in Asia since 1996. His work has appeared in the Financial Times, Wall Street Journal, Bloomberg, New York Post, Variety, Forbes, and South China Morning Post. . .

Banking and financial fraud lawyers Giambrone & Partners are recovering £25,000 for customers defrauded through a watchdog. – Finance and banking


UK: Banking and financial fraud lawyers Giambrone & Partners are recovering £25,000 for customers defrauded through a watchdog.

To print this article, all you need to do is be registered or log in to Mondaq.com.

The latest report from the Victims Commissioner indicates that more than 4.6 million people are victims of fraud each year. Many of them will suffer major losses from which they will not be able to recover.

Giambrone & Partners’ banking and financial fraud department is well aware of the dishonest methods used by fraudulent investment brokers to persuade their victims to part with their money. The majority of fraudsters follow a recognizable and well-rehearsed path to gaining the trust of their victims, by first choosing someone who has no knowledge of the markets and making sure at the same time that they have no close contact with such an acquaintance, forming a friendly and familiar relationship with their chosen victim, insofar as their requests for more and more money in “investment schemes” seem plausible and are completely accepted by the individual unfortunate.

Additionally, as the police unfortunately devote only 2% of their resources to investigating this devastating fraud, the victim often feels helpless once they recognize that they have been the subject of an elaborate fraud and that she will not get her money back from fake investment brokers. .

Joanna Bailey, who leads the banking and financial fraud team, said: “The team managed to recover the full amount of a fraudulent transaction through a regulator, in the face of strong resistance from associated organizations that were in some way party to but not responsible for the fraudulent transactions.” Joanna further commented “Our lawyers are often better able to clarify issues with regulators as well as being able to adopt and maintain the required persistence, ultimately resulting in the restoration of all or part of the lost funds. In response to requests from our clients for heavy losses due to investment fraud, we have developed a range of effective recovery approaches and strategies.”

Giambrone & Partners recognizes that victims of fraud feel alone; especially since often in their attempts to approach the regulators who are in place to help the victims, they find that they are easily rebuffed and feel that there is nothing more they can do . Giambrone & Partners bank and financial fraud lawyers have successfully assisted our clients with a strong determination to demonstrate victim liability by the two regulators tasked with protecting and compensating victims of investment fraud and other organizations that share some degree of responsibility for overseeing financial activities. and fraud prevention, frequently reiterating their duty of care and responsibilities, as appropriate.

BBC Radio 4’s Money Box highlighted a typical case in a recent podcast. Additionally, a 2021 report from Her Majesty’s Police, Fire and Rescue Inspectorate: Fraud – It’s time to choose, highlighted the fact that the vast majority of victims of fraud “receive poor service and are denied justice,” resulting in less than 8,000 lawsuits in 2019, which was before the sharp 24% increase in investment fraud seen during the Covid-induced lockdown. The steady increase in investment scams requires aggressive and relentless tactics focusing on all potential avenues of recovery.

The content of this article is intended to provide a general guide on the subject. Specialist advice should be sought regarding your particular situation.

POPULAR ARTICLES ON: UK Finance and Banking

Jersey private funds on the rise

Hawksford

Originally launched in 2017, the JPF is a profitable structure suited to the needs of a small number of sophisticated investors.

Brave New World for RFRs

Herbert Smith’s Freehills

LIBOR has almost been consigned to history for new transactions. However, there are still areas related to the use of near-risk-free rates (RFRs) where the market has not stabilized yet.

Default interest – An unenforceable penalty?

DMH Standard

In the Matter of Ahuja Investments Limited v Victorygame Limited [2021] EWHC 2382 (Ch), the court held that a default interest clause in a loan agreement was a penalty clause and therefore unenforceable.

Biomonitoring Market Size, Growth Strategies, Competitive Landscape, Factor Analysis, 2020-2027 – Instant Interview

0

The global biomonitoring market size is expected to reach USD 5.62 billion USD 3.80 billion in 2019, growing at a CAGR of 5% through 2027. Market growth is driven by outbreak of viruses and infections such as the H1N1 flu epidemic, the anthrax attacks, and the SARS epidemic, creating an imminent need for bioterrorism preparedness.

Biomonitoring is an active collection of data with appropriate analysis as well as interpretation of data from the biosphere related to disease activity and threats to animal or human health. These threats can be infectious, metabolic, toxic, naturally occurring or otherwise. Biomonitoring is an integral part of early warning of these health threats, early detection and management of health events, and awareness of disease activity. It enables early detection of outbreaks and provides the public and decision makers with accurate and timely information to prevent, manage or mitigate outbreaks. Growing incidence of chronic infections and epidemics will drive biomonitoring market share.

In the COVID-19 situation, biomonitoring has helped several regional governments to ensure that people who may have the virus remain isolated from others to contain the spread of the disease. The advantages offered by the technology to monitor the entire population in the event of a pandemic will support the growth of the global biomonitoring market over the forecast period.

Get a sample report @ https://www.reportsanddata.com/sample-enquiry-form/2991

The report provides a panoramic view of the market and insights that will help in formulating better business decisions. Moreover, the study helps companies and well-established players to better understand the market and make informed decisions. The report also examines in detail the main factors influencing the growth of the market.

Major companies operating in the market include:

Bitscopic, NanoViricides, Inc., Hawkeye Systems, Inc., Co-Diagnostics, Inc., Novavax, Inc., Gilead Sciences, Dynport Vaccine Company LLC, Bavarian Nordic, Cleveland Biolabs, and B.Ichor Medical Systems, among others

The report covers an in-depth analysis of the major market players in the market along with their business overview, expansion plans, and strategies. The report also focuses on recent strategic alliances in the market including mergers and acquisitions, joint ventures, partnerships, agreements, corporate and government agreements, product launches and brand promotions, among others .

Ask for a discount on the report @ https://www.reportsanddata.com/discount-enquiry-form/2991

The report aims to provide a better understanding of market dynamics and industry functioning on a global level. To better understand the industry, the global biomonitoring market is further segmented on the basis of key geographical regions such as North America, Latin America, Europe, Asia-Pacific, Middle East, and Europe. ‘Africa. The report also offers country-wise analysis to provide crucial information about market size, market growth, market revenue growth, and economic growth in each region.

On the basis of product types and applications offered by Biomonitoring industry, the market is segmented into:

Type Outlook (Revenue, USD Billion; 2017-2027)

  • Syndromic surveillance
  • Alternative monitoring systems
  • Laboratory monitoring
  • Environmental monitoring

Technology & Equipment Outlook (Revenue, USD Billion; 2017-2027)

  • Biocontainment technology and equipment
  • Detection technology and equipment
  • Protective technology and equipment

Application Outlook (Revenue, USD Billion; 2017-2027)

  • Human and animal populations
  • The water
  • Food
  • Agriculture
  • Environment

End-Use Outlook (Revenue, USD Billion; 2017-2027)

  • Biomonitoring
  • Threat Reduction
  • Biosecurity
  • Disastrous response
  • Medical information

The regional analysis covers:

  • North America
  • Europe
    • Germany
    • UK.
    • Italy
    • France
    • BENELUX
    • The rest of Europe
  • Asia Pacific
    • China
    • India
    • Japan
    • South Korea
    • Rest of APAC
  • Latin America
  • Middle East and Africa
    • Saudi Arabia
    • EA
    • South Africa
    • Rest of MEA

To learn more about the report @ https://www.reportsanddata.com/report-detail/biosurveillance-market

Benefits of Biomonitoring Market Report:

  • Overview of opportunities and risks in the biomonitoring sector
  • Study of recent innovations and developments in the industry
  • In-depth study of the growth pattern of the biomonitoring industry
  • In-depth assessment of the competitive landscape of major biomonitoring industry players
  • Analysis of Biomonitoring Market Drivers, Restraints, and Opportunities
  • Evaluation of technological developments and latest industry trends

Request Report Customization @ https://www.reportsanddata.com/request-customization-form/2991


Thank you for reading our report. For customization or additional request, please contact us. Our team will ensure that the report is tailored to your needs.

Browse more reports:

Anesthesia Machines Market @ https://www.biospace.com/article/revenue-growth-of-the-global-market-for-anesthesia-machines-is-being-drive-by-the-increasing-number -of-surgical-procedures-reports-and-data/

Retinal Implant Market @ https://www.biospace.com/article/increasing-geriatric-population-coupled-with-rise-in-cases-of-degenerative-diseases-is-a-major-growth-driving-factor – for-the-global-retinal-implants-market-reports-and-data/

Auto-injector market @ https://www.biospace.com/article/increasing-prevalence-of-anaphylactic-shock-rising-awareness-about-auto-injectors-and-patient-preference-for-self-injection- are-major-growth-driving-factors-for-the-global-auto-injectors-market-reports-and-data/

Antiglaucoma Eye Drops Market @ https://www.biospace.com/article/antiglaucoma-eye-drops-market-size-growth-demand-industry-outlook-2021-2028/

EEG and ECG Biometrics Market @ https://www.biospace.com/article/rising-opportunities-for-players-operating-in-the-global-eeg-and-ecg-biometrics-market/

Gastrointestinal Cancer Drugs Market @ https://www.biospace.com/article/ongoing-trends-in-the-gastrointestinal-cancer-drugs-market-and-forecast-analysis-by-2021-2028/

About reports and data

Reports and Data is a market research and consulting firm that provides syndicated research reports, custom research reports and consulting services. Our solutions are uniquely focused on your goal of locating, targeting and analyzing changes in consumer behavior across demographics, across industries and helping customers make a smarter business decision. We offer market intelligence research ensuring relevant, fact-based research across multiple sectors including healthcare, technology, chemicals, power and energy. We are constantly updating our search offerings to ensure that our clients are aware of the latest trends existing in the market. Reports and Data has a strong base of experienced analysts from a variety of areas of expertise.

Contact us:

Jean W

Business Development Manager

Reports and Data | Web: www.reportsanddata.com

Direct line: +1-212-710-1370

Email: [email protected]

Nassau County Traffic Halt Leads to Seizure of Guns and Drug Trafficking

0

JACKSONVILLE, Florida. – A man and woman were arrested Thursday on charges stemming from a traffic stop in Nassau County, where the Florida Highway Patrol said troopers confiscated firearms and drugs.

Soldiers said they discovered fentanyl, molly, marijuana and six firearms. They arrested Lonnie Austin, 42, and Linda Banks, 50.

According to the arrest report, a soldier who first spotted them sitting in a car in the parking lot of a closed business early Thursday morning suspected something was wrong. The trooper said that when he pulled into the parking lot to get closer to their vehicle, it appears Austin was trying to avoid him and drove off.

The trooper said he was unable to follow the vehicle due to traffic, so the trooper called another nearby trooper to have the vehicle stopped because Austin was not wearing a seat belt. The vehicle was stopped on US 17.

The trooper who arrested Austin said he smelled marijuana emanating from the car and saw a gun in the car as well as drug paraphernalia, which gave the trooper a likely reason to search the car. During the search, FHP said, the soldier found several firearms and drug dealing.

A d

According to an arrest report, just before Austin entered jail, he confessed to a Nassau County deputy that he still had drugs on him. The report says Austin removed a vial of oxycodone pills that were hidden inside his body, then tried to bribe the deputy by offering him $5,000 to destroy the pills and pretend it wasn’t. is ever produced.

Investigators say the withdrawal of the oxycodone pills and the attempted bribery were both recorded on the MP’s body camera.

Lonnie Austin, Linda Banks. Photos: Department of Corrections.

Copyright 2022 by WJXT News4Jax – All Rights Reserved.

The Richmond Observer – Record business growth, bird flu focus at April State Council meeting

0

RALEIGH — The growth of new businesses in North Carolina shows no signs of stopping, according to Secretary of State Elaine Marshall. “Nothing has slowed down. In fact, it has accelerated,” she said during the State Council on Tuesday April 4. A new record was set for the first quarter of this year with almost 47,000 new businesses created from January to March, compared to the record of 45,000 registered last year in the same quarter.

“What’s even more staggering is that two years ago, during this same period, our new business start-ups were 26,000,” Marshall said. “It’s more than 80% growth in two years. We register 700 new companies a day. She said March 2022 was the third-highest month on record for new business start-ups with their agency, at 17,263, just shy of the peak months of May and June last year.

“We survey these new business owners and they see new opportunities to put money in their pockets and jobs in their communities,” Marshall summed up. “These are not people who have lost their jobs and have nowhere to go. This is overall a boost for our national and local economies.

She said the easiest way for people to file an annual return is to go online to their website, https://www.sosnc.gov/. Reports must be submitted by April 18.

Agriculture Commissioner Steve Troxler said they are currently dealing with three cases of high-grade bird flu that have been discovered on commercial turkey farms in Johnston County.

“We’ve been preparing for an outbreak like this for some time,” he said. Like any emergency, the size and scope of this crisis will determine how we handle it. It seems to be accelerating at this point. Although this is a very fluid situation, Troxler said he is confident that their Emergency Programs Division and Veterinary Division are well prepared to deal with it. “We have a great partnership with all of our integrators in the state and the USDA and we hope it ends quickly,” he said.

State Treasurer Dale Folwell said bank tellers and others had told his agency that teenagers were entering banks posing as owners with checks worth tens of thousands. dollars from the HOPE program. The HOPE program was administered by the NC Office of Recovery and Resiliency, which was established by the General Assembly to provide rent and utility assistance to low-income tenants through COVID relief funding, who are experiencing hardship. financial due to pandemic policies, protecting them against disconnections and evictions from public services. Folwell thanked bank officials for their keen intuition, realizing that teenagers don’t have bank accounts.

April is Financial Literacy Month

Junior Achievement USA says it’s never too early to teach kids about money

TEMPE, Ariz. (KYMA, KECY) — Now, April designated as Financial Literacy Month isn’t about celebrating your finances, it’s about challenging yourself to improve your situation. Financial Literacy Month was designed to promote early and ongoing financial education.

Tempe-based educational strategy company Junior Achievements USA has been offering its program for children since the late 1950s. They emphasize financial literacy with both information and in-person education.

Anne Landers, vice president of strategic impact for JA, says it’s never too early to teach kids about money. In most cases, children learn about money through play, and Landers says this is a great time to introduce financial responsibility.

Games like Monopoly can teach kids about money management, but Landers suggests things like credit and debt be introduced. Landers suggests that parents give their children a loan and physically show them how credit works by issuing an interest rate.

Now, if the child pays off the loan on time, a parent would reward the child’s “good credit” with a larger loan. In turn, if the child does not repay the money within the stipulated time, he will face interest charges and his next loan will be refused, due to “bad credit”.

Landers also suggests talking with your child and asking him where he would like to live (house, apartment…) in the future and what kind of work he imagines himself doing. She says parents should then research what this career pays for and what the cost of living would be.

Landers adds that parents should also add the cost of transportation (loan, rental), food and entertainment and see if the child’s future plans are feasible.

Landers says this exercise will give children a broader perspective. Depending on the age of the child, parents can modify the language so that their child understands.

Junior Achievements offers a variety of lesson plans on online tools to help parents.

Tronox Provides Update Regarding Venator Litigation

0

STAMFORD, Conn., April 6, 2022 /PRNewswire/ — Tronox Holdings plc (NYSE: TROX) (“Tronox” or the “Company”), the world’s leading integrated manufacturer of titanium dioxide pigments, today announced that the judge overseeing the litigation with Venator Materials plc (“Venator”) decided the case against Tronox. Therefore, Tronox will have to pay a $75 million “Break Fee” in accordance with the terms of an “Exclusive Contract” concluded in July 2018 as part of the Tronox/Cristal merger.

Tronox continues to believe in the merits of the case and is disappointed with the judge’s decision. Tronox is investigating the decision and whether to appeal the decision. This payment will not have a material impact on future operations, although Tronox plans to reduce the free cash flow forecast for 2022 accordingly. and will provide an update when it releases its first quarter financial results.

About Tronox

Tronox Holdings plc is one of the world’s leading producers of high quality titanium products, including titanium dioxide pigments, special grade titanium dioxide products and high purity titanium chemicals, and zircon . We mine titanium-bearing mineral sands and operate beneficiation facilities that produce high-quality titanium feedstock, pig iron and other minerals. With approximately 6,500 employees across six continents, our rich diversity, unrivaled vertical integration model, and unparalleled operational and technical expertise across the value chain, position Tronox as the world’s leading producer of titanium dioxide. For more information on how our products add shine and durability to paints, plastics, papers and other everyday products, visit tronox.com.

Caution Regarding Forward-Looking Statements

Statements contained in this release that are not historical are forward-looking statements within the meaning of the United States Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. These forward-looking statements, which are subject to known and unknown risks, uncertainties and assumptions about us, may include projections of our future financial performance, including the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic and anticipated synergies based on our growth and other strategies, the expected completion of extensions and upgrades to our mining and our operations, anticipated trends in our business, anticipated costs and benefits of the newTRON and Atlas Campaspe project and the Company’s anticipated capital allocation strategy. These statements are only predictions based on our current expectations and projections regarding future events. There are important factors that could cause our actual results, levels of activity, performance or achievements to differ materially from the results, levels of activity, performance or achievements expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements. Significant risks and uncertainties may relate to, but are not limited to, business and market disruptions, including those related to the COVID-19 pandemic, supply chain disruptions, market conditions and price volatility of titanium dioxide, zircon and other raw materials, as well as global and regional economic downturns, including as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic, which negatively impact the demand for our end-use products; production disruptions at our mining and manufacturing facilities; and other financial, economic, competitive, environmental, political, legal and regulatory factors. These and other risk factors are discussed in the Company’s filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

In addition, we operate in a highly competitive and rapidly changing environment. New risks and uncertainties arise from time to time, and it is not possible for our management to predict all risks and uncertainties, nor can management assess the impact of all factors on our business or the extent to which any factor, or combination of factors, could cause actual results to differ materially from those contained in the forward-looking statements. Although we believe that the expectations reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot guarantee future results, level of activity, performance or achievements. Neither we nor any other person assumes responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of these forward-looking statements. You should not rely on forward-looking statements as predictions of future events. Except as required by applicable law, we undertake no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information or future developments.

Media Contact: Melissa Zona
+1.636.751.4057
Investor contacts: Jennifer Guenther
+1.646.960.6598

SOURCE Tronox Holdings plc

Auto sales in value hit a record in 2021, while unit sales fall

0

Cars for export are parked at Hyundai Motor’s Ulsan plant in January [YONHAP]

The number of cars sold in Korea fell in 2021, but as the sales went up, the figure increased and reached an all-time high.

A total of 1.7 million cars were sold in Korea last year, 9 percent less than in 2020, according to data released by the Korea Automobile Manufacturers Association (KAMA) on Wednesday.

“Tax incentives and revenge purchases drove up demand for cars in Korea in 2020,” the association explained.

“In 2021, car sales couldn’t even reach the recent average due to disruptions in supply chains, which led to a delay in the delivery of cars.”

On average, 1.8 million cars have been sold in Korea per year over the past five years.

In terms of value, car sales totaled 76.6 trillion won ($62.9 billion) in Korea last year, a record high and up 1.8 percent.

“The growing demand for imported cars, large SUVs and electric cars is the main reason for this increase,” the association said.

The average price of a car sold in Korea was 44.2 million won last year, breaking the 40 million won mark for the first time.

The popularity of imported cars, including so-called super cars costing over 400 million won, continued.

The number of imported cars sold in Korea hit a record high last year of 309,000, up 2.3 percent, while unit sales of domestic cars fell 11.1 percent.

A total of 1,542 super cars, including Ferrari, Bentley, Rolls-Royce, Lamborghini and McLaren models, were sold in 2021, up 25%.

By sales amount, imported cars accounted for 32% of the 76.6 trillion won market. This is the first time that imported cars account for more than 30% of the Korean car market in terms of sales amount.

Among imported brands, German brands are in the lead, with 192,000 sales, up 2.6%. A total of 48,000 American cars were sold, up 6.4%.

Koreans bought 17,833 Teslas, up from 11,829 in 2020.

The popularity of large SUVs and electric vehicles (EVs), which tend to be more expensive than sedans and internal combustion engine vehicles, has helped boost sales.

The number of large SUVs sold in Korea last year jumped 5.4%, while sedan sales fell 16.1%.

The number of electric vehicles sold in Korea stood at 100,355 last year, up 115.2%, while unit sales of gasoline cars fell 10.8% and motor cars 29.2% diesel.

BY JIN EUN-SOO [[email protected]]

Construction of OKC’s northeast subdivision could begin in the fall

0

These are examples of housing types included in the Creston Park Neighborhood Affordable Housing Project. The Oklahoma City Council is expected to vote next week on $1.25 million in financial support for phase one of the project. (Courtesy/Community Enhancement Corp.)

OKLAHOMA CITY — Construction of an affordable housing subdivision that has been in the planning stages for years could begin in the fall if the Oklahoma City Council approves the necessary funding next week.

The first phase of the three-phase Creston Park neighborhood affordable housing project in northeast Oklahoma City was fully funded at one point, but rising construction costs increased the amount needed, Ian said. Colgan of the Oklahoma City Housing Authority.

OCHA and its nonprofit arm, the Community Enhancement Corp., are seeking an allocation of $1.25 million from the proceeds of the Limited General Duty Tax Bonds to fill the gap. The total cost of the project was estimated at just under $40 million when the request was made and is now around $42 million, Colgan said Tuesday.

“Construction costs are an ongoing and fluctuating issue,” he said.

The city’s Economic Development Trust approved the $1.25 million allocation in July, and it was presented to city council in September. A vote on the item was postponed at the request of councilor Nikki Nice, who expressed concern about relocating residents to current housing that will be demolished to make way for the new development.

The project site – along Martin Luther King Avenue between NE 26 and NE 29 streets – includes 159 units on 15 acres known as Northeast Duplexes Public Housing along with an additional 15 acres of vacant land to the east .

The construction of phase 1 requires the demolition of 95 of the current dwellings. Colgan said about half of the residents moved on their own, and OCHA’s relocation coordinator worked with the remaining 39 residents to relocate. They were offered moving costs and their choice of a housing voucher, housing in other public housing or vacant housing on the site which is not demolished until the end of the first phase , did he declare.

“We offer the right of return (to a new unit) to anyone who wants it,” Colgan said.

The completed development will have four times the accommodation – 370 family homes, 60 independent seniors’ units and 150 assisted living/memory care units. It will be a mix of social housing and other affordable housing, Colgan said.

Plans also include commercial spaces along Martin Luther King, a community center, family resource center, education center, senior living center, activity grounds and pocket parks.

“It’s a big project and one of the biggest investments in the northeast,” Colgan said. “This is one of the biggest affordable housing developments in decades. It is more necessary than ever. »

The funding request was reintroduced to the city council last week before a final hearing and vote on April 12. Nice again requested that it be postponed.

“We all want development. The plan is great but… I always get asked what’s going on there and I don’t have an answer,” she said.

Vice Mayor Mark Stonecipher suggested the funding request be accepted and forwarded to the final hearing when more information can be presented.

“So if we’re not there, we can reschedule it,” Stonecipher said. “It’s an expensive project. Every month we wait, building materials keep going up and up and up.

The article passed 5-3 and will be taken up again on Tuesday for a final hearing and vote.

YOWELL: U.Va. must financially support student survivors of sexual assault – The Cavalier Daily

The University has a long history of sexual violence. University founder Thomas Jefferson had a sexual relationship with Sally Hemings that can only be defined as rape. Hemings was only 14 when Jefferson was 44 – and to state the obvious, he owned it by law. Hemings was unable to give or withhold consent. It was also not rare for the first students of the University – exclusively white men at the time – to aggression the enslaved servants around Grounds. Given this violence, one can easily trace the lineage of sexual violence on and around Grounds. With an honor system that doesn’t judge sexual assault case, a verycritical Title IX Office and a well established failure story survivorsthere was plenty requests change the University’s relationship with sexual violence. One of the immediate and effective ways for the University to support survivors of sexual assault on grounds is to ensure that they are not left with the financial burden of their assault. The University should establish an easily accessible and comprehensive fund to immediately pay survivors’ hospital bills.

rape is valued to have the highest annual cost to victims of all crimes, amounting to approximately $127 billion per year not including child sexual abuse cases. For reference, the estimated annual cost of assault victims is around $93 billion, murder is estimated at around $61 billion, and child abuse is around $56 billion. While federal law stipulates that victims of sexual assault do not have to pay for their physical examination following a rape, which often consists of a rape kit, there is ambiguity about how this is applied and where the money comes from to compensate hospitals. For example, some states use money victims of crime law, while others benefit from the budgets of public bodies, such as law enforcement agencies or prosecutors’ offices.

the Contents said exam also vary from state to state. The bare minimum requires that “the patient be interviewed and examined for physical trauma, penetration or force, and that evidence be collected and evaluated.” However, the law does not require states to pay for emergency contraceptive pills, treatment for sexually transmitted diseases, pregnancy or STD tests, treatment for physical injuries, mental health care, or transportation costs. by ambulance. Although some states, such as New York, exceed the minimum and cover some of these treatment options, not all do, and none are required to. from Virginia SAFE payment program allows hospitals to bill the program directly if and only if the victim chooses to have evidence collected. If the victim requires treatment beyond the scope of the collection of evidence, he will be personally billed for said treatment. In some cases, however, they may receive reimbursement for HIV prevention treatment only. Therefore, while some survivors are not charged for the actual collection of evidence, they are still charged for other necessary treatment, and any survivors who choose not to have a rape kit prepared will be charged for all medical care.

Moreover, it is not rare so that the survivors “slip through the cracks”. This is often due to increased billing automation in hospitals, which results in many rape victims being illegally billed for rape kits. In 2018, for example, the New York Attorney General’s Office announcement that 200 sexual assault survivors had each been illegally billed amounts ranging from $46 to $3,000 at seven different hospitals. Additionally, a study of 1,355 sexual assault survivors with health insurance showed that the average cost of a rape in the first 30 days after the assault is $948. This represents 14% of the total cost of treatment, with the remaining 86% being paid by insurance companies. These charges were brought legally, meaning sexual assault survivors — even with established financial protections — still end up with significant economic burdens after their assault.

It should also be noted that if these women had not had health insurance, the average treatment costs would total well over $948. Additionally, some survivors while searching privacy do not file claims with their health insurance providers for fear that loved ones with the same insurance plan will find out about the charges and ask questions. Therefore, one can see how systematic failures leave survivors without sufficient financial protection for the costs incurred as a result of their sexual assault. This is where the University comes in.

The University not only has the opportunity to finally do something good for survivors of sexual assault on or around Grounds – it has a responsibility. The University’s harrowing history of sexual violence will never be reconciled – however, it doesn’t have to be perpetuated either. The university administration must use the abundant resources available to ease the financial burden on victims of sexual assault and to cover all treatment-related costs. This includes students who experience sexual violence on or off the field, such as around the corner or in off-campus housing.

While providing the financial resources to support survivors is a necessary step, it does not absolve the University of other obligations to survivors, such as seeking justice, nor does it replace prevention. It is important to remember that there are many pieces to the puzzle — the University must answer all requests. However, the creation of this fund for survivors of sexual assault is a measure of action that we must demand of the University. Financially covering the treatment of survivors is one avenue the University can take to begin to end its cycle of ignoring or allowing sexual violence.

Hailey Yowell is an opinion columnist for The Cavalier Daily. She can be reached at [email protected]

The opinions expressed in this column are not necessarily those of The Cavalier Daily. The columns represent the opinions of the authors only.

What’s driving the big resignation? These may not be the factors you expect.

0

It’s not money that’s driving the ‘big quit’ in which 4.3 million workers left their jobs in January, followed by another 4.4 million in February.

A major research project completed a few months ago makes this clear. The MIT Sloan Management Review studied 600 companies that had quit rates higher than their industry benchmark and assessed a large number of employee quits. A toxic company culture is 10 times more likely to predict revenue than salary.

Here’s what the researchers learned. Salary was the 16th most important factor in employee retention. A toxic corporate culture, which includes managerial mistreatment of workers, dishonesty and a lack of ethics, disrespect, bullying and abusive or harsh behavior, was 10 times more important than salary as a reason why the employees left their employer.

In addition to costing employees, research proves that a toxic culture reduces remaining employee engagement in the workplace by 20%. Not only is the big quit hampering many employers, but turnover contagion is on the rise, with employee quits inspiring co-worker quits.

Several other studies support the price employers pay for allowing disrespect and other forms of abuse. One of the most famous, documented by the Quality Management Institute and the Harvard Business Review, reveals:

• 80% of employees exposed to incivility spend time worrying about the incident and the rudeness of their colleagues;

• 78% of employees who are victims of incivility declare that their commitment to their employer has diminished;

• 66% said their performance at work had decreased;

• 63% lost work time by avoiding the offender;

• 48% intentionally reduced their work effort.

Employers who want to retain talent and achieve high performance need to fix their culture, instead of applying temporary band-aids in the form of raises and bonuses to ensure retention and boost productivity.

What can employers do? Many.

Take an honest look: You can’t fix a problem you won’t look at. Do you have a code of conduct that few people follow? Do you employ managers, supervisors or co-workers who overwhelm others? Are some of your top producers engaging in unethical behavior that you turn a blind eye to?

Leader Actions: As I wrote in my recent book, “Managing for Accountability: A Business Leader’s Toolbox,” leaders shape the culture of the organization and must follow their lead, modeling the ethics and behaviors that they want to see in their organization. If leaders want employees to work with honesty and commitment, leaders must demonstrate integrity and work ethics.

Intervene: Problems don’t get better when they are ignored. Pretending to respect, but ignoring managers or employees who deny the truth, bully, or advance through unethical treatment, much like ignoring mold in a refrigerator.

Mold is spreading and bad behavior drives good employees away. What would happen if you purged your worst bad actors? Some shrewd employers are taking action, like when Netflix fired 3 managers for insulting their colleagues on the company’s Slack channel.

Manage your organization: Leaders should invest in actions that create healthy places. This includes:

• Actively engage with their employees and solicit their feedback so that they can understand and act to address their employees’ concerns;

• Establish a corporate ethics policy;

• Train managers, supervisors and employees in effective communication and conflict management techniques so that problems can be resolved before they escalate;

• Reward good behavior and create organizational justice;

• Ensure harassment policies are up to date given the increase in cyberbullying that accompanies remote working.

The reward ? You will keep your best talent. You will become an employer of choice, able to attract other high performers, giving you a competitive advantage. And your leaders and employees will feel good going to work today and tomorrow.

How Russia’s Gas Rollback Is Confusing Global Markets

0

Mr. Di Odoardo estimates that LNG flows from the United States to Europe have already reached two-thirds of the bilateral target for this year, and that it should therefore be “easy” to achieve it.

Washington has also relied on other countries, including Japan, to forgo some of their shipments, leading to a substantial drop in shipments to Asia from the United States, analysts said. Over time, however, such generosity can be a harder sell, especially if the war in Ukraine drags on indefinitely and markets tighten further.

“Under current conditions, I don’t think Japan has the leeway to commit to continued long-term LNG shipments,” said Michitaka Hattori, director of the Japan Institute for Russian Economic Studies and NIS.

The surest way to lower prices is to increase supply. High prices will encourage marginal increases in exports, but it usually takes more than two years to build new gas processing facilities like the terminal Germany wants to build. Of course, demand for liquefied natural gas, which grew 6% in 2021, will most likely continue to grow as China and other countries switch to gas from dirty coal.

“I think the winter gas market is going to remain very tight due to Asia’s shift from coal to gas,” said Marco Alverà, chief executive of Snam, a major Italian energy company.

Cheniere Energy is moving forward with a major expansion of its export facility in Corpus Christi, Texas. Qatar also says it is working on adding a huge amount of liquefied natural gas over the next five years.

Developers, however, will be wary whether the current boom in Europe could fade long before the expiration of new LNG projects, which are typically expected to operate for 20 years or more. And European leaders insist they still see gas as a temporary solution before renewable energy sources such as wind, solar and hydrogen take over.

“There’s a question mark there about how much new gas will be needed,” said Mr Henderson of the Oxford Institute.

Ben Doley and Makiko Inoue contributed reporting from Tokyo, and Melissa Eddy from Berlin.

CentralNic Group Releases 2021 Audited Annual Report, Reports Record Growth and Expands ESG Initiatives

0

LONDON, April 4, 2022 /PRNewswire/ — CentralNic Group PLC (AIM: CNIC), the online marketplace for domain names and online presence and customer acquisition tools, is pleased to announce that the audited annual report for fiscal year 2021 is now available on the Company’s website at the following link: https://investor.centralnicgroup.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/04/Annual-Report-2021.pdf.

The annual report contains the company’s confirmed financial results, showing record revenue and profitability growth in 2021, including:

  • Turnover increased by 71% to reach $410.5 million (financial year 2020: $240.0 million)
  • Organic revenue increased 39% (FY 2020: 9%)
  • Net income (gross profit) increased by 58% to reach $118.5 million (financial year 2020: $75.1 million)

Thanks to the excellent financial performance of CentralNic Group, in March 2022 the company was listed among the 250 fastest growing companies and among the 50 fastest growing technology companies in Europe in the sixth annual Financial Times FT 1000 report.

CentralNic Group’s 2021 Annual Report also includes a more comprehensive presentation of CentralNic Group’s ESG strategy and how its initiatives feed into that strategy. The company expanded the number and scope of its environmental, social and governance initiatives and practices in 2021, while maintaining its carbon neutral status since 2020.

Ben CrawfordCEO of CentralNic, said:
“We are delighted to report that CentralNic delivered a very strong performance in 2021, achieving record organic growth of 39%. Our significant and consistent investment in world-class talent and state-of-the-art products has greatly contributed to the Group’s continued success.

CentralNic’s 2021 results demonstrate the potential of its strong market model for online presence and online marketing services. With the completion of the acquisition of VGL in March 2022, we recently enriched our Online Marketing marketplace with a perfectly complementary asset. Strong earnings, excellent cash conversion and a healthy balance sheet will allow us to add more targeted acquisitions to both of our markets, complementing our strong organic growth. Although it remains early in the new financial year, we remain confident in our prospects for this year and beyond.”

About CentralNic Group plc
CentralNic (AIM: CNIC) is a London Stock Exchange-listed global technology company that drives the growth of the global digital economy by providing businesses around the world with tools to build their online presence, win customers and generate revenue. online income. The company complements its organic growth with targeted acquisitions of cash-generating businesses in its industry with annuity revenue streams and exposure to growth markets and migrating them to CentralNic software and operating platforms. CentralNic operates globally with customers in almost every country in the world. It derives recurring revenue from worldwide sales of online presence and online marketing services on a subscription or pay-as-you-go basis. For more information, please visit: www.centralnicgroup.com

For more information, contact CentralNic Group [email protected]

SOURCE CentralNic Group

Lions Club Hosts Fundraiser for Ukrainian Refugees

The Sunshine Coast Lions Club, in partnership with the Lighthouse Pub, will organize a fundraiser to help Ukrainian refugees.

With more than three million people displaced by this terrible conflict, the needs are great.

The club will hold a beer and burger night at the Lighthouse Pub on Sunday, April 10. There will also be a silent auction, already very well supported by the local business community, and a 50/50 draw.

100% of funds raised will go directly to helping refugees through the Lions Clubs International Foundation (LCIF) Ukraine Appeal.

The Financial Times named the Lions Foundation as the #1 NGO to partner with.

Fiscal responsibility and transparency are important to LCIF. LCIF supports large-scale projects that meet the humanitarian needs of entire communities. These projects are led by local Lions who identify the need, develop the action plan and carry out the project. The money we collect will go directly to people in need.

The event will take place from 12 p.m. to 7 p.m.

Tickets are available at the Lighthouse Pub, Tasters Oil and Vinegar, 5685 Cowrie Street, and from Lions members.

We hope you’ll join us for a $25 burger and a beer (or glass of wine) and support this event.

If you have an item you would like to donate, please call Linda Stroud at 778-458-2017 or email [email protected]

2022 Trends: Split Case Fire Pump Market Driver, Manufactures and Analysis by 2027 | Pentair, Grundfos, Flowserve, Sulzer, Rosenbauer

0

Report Hive Research has presented a new report on Global Split Case Fire Pump Market 2022, Forecast to 2030. This report is the product of a comprehensive analysis of Split Case Fire Pump market trends and forecasts till 2030. This report covers an exhaustive study of the data which affects the market with respect to manufacturers, suppliers, market players and customers. The report also includes an overview of technology applications and strategies employed by industry leaders. The market report also talks about the past, present and future market scenarios of the Split Case Fire Pumps market. Market reports include market value and volume at different levels. In addition to this, the report contains information such as company profiles, product specifications and production capacity of Split Case Fire Pump industries. The growth rate of the market represented in terms of CAGR percentage is also defined for the forecast period 2022-2030.

Get FREE Sample Split Casing Fire Pump Market Report for Better Understanding:@https://www.reporthive.com/request_sample/3101330

Get up to 20% off using promo code: RHR20

Split Casing Fire Pumps Market Competition by Top Manufacturers/Key Player Profiled:

Pentair, Grundfos, Flowserve, Sulzer, Rosenbauer, IDEX, Ebara, Waterous, ITT, KSB, WILO, Darley, SHIBAURA, Shanghai Kaiquan, NFFCO, LIANCHENG Group, CNP, PACIFIC PUMP, Shaanxi Aerospace Power, EAST PUMP, ZHONGQUAN Pump, GeXin Pump

Research objectives:

Post-COVID Analysis on Market Growth and Size (Growth Potential, Opportunities, Drivers, Industry-Specific Challenges & Risks). To study and analyze the global Casing Fire Pumps market size split by key regions/countries, product type and application, history data from 2016 to 2022, and forecast to 2027.

The study covers the current market size of the Split Case Fire Pump market and its growth rates based on 5 year records with company overview of Key Players/Manufacturers:

To understand the structure of Split Casing Fire Pump market by identifying its various subsegments.
Focuses on the key Global Split Case Fire Pump Market players, to define, describe and analyze the value, market share, market competition landscape, SWOT analysis and development plans in coming years. To analyze the Split Casing Fire Pumps Market with respect to individual growth trends, future prospects, and their contribution to the total market.

Analyze competitive developments such as expansions, agreements, new product launches, and acquisitions in the market to better understand the pre and post COVID scenario.

Case Fire Pump Market Split by Type:

Motor drive
Electric

Case Fire Pump Market Split by Applications:

Industrial application
Commercial app
Others

>>> To purchase this premium report click here @ https://reporthive.com/checkout?currency=single-user-licence&reportid=3101330

Important Regions of the Split Case Fire Pump Market

North America
Europe
Asia Pacific
Latin America
Middle East and Africa

People also ask for information such as:

1.What are the significant segments operating in the Split Case Fire Pump Market?

2. What is the scope of the report?

3. What is the best split case fire pump?

4.What is the usage of Split Case Fire Pump?

Scope of Market Research Work

The important objectives of the study are to execute and provide in-depth analysis of development rates, size, value, stocks and promote the development of the worldwide Split Case Fire Pump industry, in plus market trends and market variables that influence Split Case Fire Pump Growth and development. This report considers risks with respect to Split Casing Fire Pump market vendors as well as hurdles in addition to market manufacturers.

For the custom PDF report template:
https://www.reporthive.com/request_customization/3101330

Split Case Fire Pump Market Challenges

– Financial importance of article reviews
– Increased regulatory research
– High cost of lighting

Adding a truly universal perspective with the most comprehensive report available in this market covering over 50 topographies.

* Find out how Split Casing Fire Pumps Market is affected by Coronavirus and how it will reasonably rise and expand as the effect of the infection wanes.
* Make rural and national techniques based on neighborhood information and examination.
* Identify growth segments to consider.
* Circle the contenders using the hypotheses information and upcoming drivers and models in the market.
* Understand buyers based on the latest analytics survey results.

Why report a search on the hive?
Report Hive Research provides strategic market research reports, statistical surveys, industry analysis and forecast data on products and services, markets and companies. Our clientele includes a mix of global business leaders, government organizations, SMEs, individuals and start-ups, leading management consultancies, universities, and more. Our library of over 700,000 reports targets high-growth emerging markets in the United States, Europe, Middle East, Africa, Asia-Pacific covering industries such as IT, Telecom, Semiconductor , chemicals, healthcare, pharmaceuticals, energy and power, manufacturing, automotive and transport, food and beverages, etc. This extensive collection of insightful reports helps clients stay ahead of the competition. We assist in business decision making on aspects such as market entry strategies, market size, market share analysis, sales and revenue, technology trends, competitive analysis, product portfolio and application analysis, etc.

Contact us:

Report a search on the hive

500 Northern Michigan Avenue,

Office 6014,

Chicago, Illinois – 60611,

United States

Website: https://www.reporthive.com

E-mail: [email protected]

Call: +1 312-604-7084

X”

Conservatives fear polling disaster over high taxes | Cost of living crisis

0

Chancellor Rishi Sunak faces a growing Tory revolt over economic policy and his handling of the cost of living crisis, as senior Tories warn that high taxes will fatally undermine their party’s appeal to the masses. voters in the next general election.

Former Tory cabinet minister David Davis said on Saturday that while the Tories became known as the high tax party, the damage to their economic reputation would be as deep and lasting as that inflicted on the government of John Major by the Black Wednesday disaster in September 1992.

Davis told the Observer that with the country now operating with the highest overall tax burden in decades, the electoral dangers were clear.

“Gaining a reputation as the high-tax party will hurt the Conservative Party as much as the ERM crisis did to us in the 1990s,” Davis said.

The UK’s chaotic and costly exit from the EU exchange rate mechanism tarnished the Major government’s reputation for economic management and set it on course for the landslide defeat of New Labor in 1997.

A poll for the LabourList website last week sparked serious concern among Tory MPs as it found the Tories were already seen as the high-tax party by more voters (39%) than this opinion work (27%).

Asked what they considered the low-tax party, 30% cited Labor and 27% cited the Conservatives in the Savanta ComRes survey.

Even after offering some limited tax cuts in last month’s spring statement, as Sunak tried to blunt the effects of the cost of living crisis, the overall tax burden in the UK is still at its worst. high level since the 1950s, when the country was rebuilding after World War II.

Sunak, who would travel to California for an Easter holiday, used his spring statement to cut fuel taxes by 5 pence a liter and announced that the threshold at which people start paying National Insurance would rise from £9,568 to £12,750 in July.

While insisting he was committed to low taxes, however, he decided to withhold most of an estimated £20billion war chest from extra tax revenue resulting from inflation for the pre-election tax cuts. In a highly unusual move, he promised a reduction in the basic rate of income tax from 20p to 19p – but not before 2024.

Many Tory MPs believe he should offer tax cuts now to spur growth, and that it will be too late to pose as chancellor of tax cuts in 2024. Others have blamed him not doing enough to support low wages and those on benefits.

As protests over the cost of living unfolded across the country on Saturday, former Conservative leader Iain Duncan Smith said that instead of keeping taxes high to control the deficit, Sunak should boost economic growth by lowering them, and at the same time offering more help to people on Universal Credit by increasing the amount they can earn before their benefits are reduced.

Warning of continued high taxes and the risk of stagflation – low growth and rising inflation – Duncan Smith said: “Fiscal compression is a disaster right now and we shouldn’t be doing it. Reducing the deficit will actually make the stagflation problem worse.

Veteran Tory MP Peter Bone says the Chancellor must act now to cut taxes, or risk a repeat of the 1990s when voters became fixated on a lack of Tory economic skill that proved impossible to change before the 1997 general election.

“John Major got the economy back on track [after the ERM debacle] but the electorate had made its decision long before and had said to itself: “we are going to give the others a chance”. We still have time to get it right, but we have to do it now. We need to correct course now.

A new analysis by the Resolution Foundation of tax measures taken by Sunak reveals that they will raise £14 billion in the financial year.

Shadow Chief Treasury Secretary Pat McFadden said: ‘The Conservatives have become the party of high taxation because they are the party of low economic growth. The Conservative government is the only G7 country to raise income taxes this year.

Labor proposes a windfall tax targeted on the profits of North Sea oil and gas companies to help families pay their energy bills, and have always opposed higher National Insurance contributions by Sunak.

There are also pressures from elsewhere for private companies to offer their help. A study of shareholder payments made by the ‘big six’ energy providers shows that dividends and share buybacks amounted to £43.5billion over the past decade.

The Common Wealth think tank, which carried out the study, said the suppliers – Centrica, EDF, E.ON and its subsidiary nPower, Scottish Power and Scottish & Southern (SSE) – were in a sound financial position and could afford to offset some of the soaring electricity and gas prices for their customers.

Meanwhile, growing pressure is being felt by food banks as people struggle to make ends meet and resort to increasingly desperate measures to keep warm and feed their families.

Gerard Woodhouse, a local labor councilor who runs the L6 community center in Everton, Liverpool, told the food bank and food union that charity runs were opening six days a week instead of four due to increased demand, but at the same time had seen a reduction in donations in recent days because “people who once gave now need help themselves”.

“The stores give out potatoes, leeks, cabbages, but I can’t get rid of them. They are returned to me because people say, ‘It costs too much to cook’,” he said.

In other cases, “people go to bed at 6 p.m., so they don’t need to turn on the heating or use the electricity. The amount of people asking for thicker duvets is crazy. If I had had 200 this week, they would have gone,” he said. “You hear about the bad times of the thirties. These stories are happening now today. It’s just gonna get worse and worse. »

TWSE-listed companies post record pre-tax profit in 2021

0

Taipei, April 2 (CNA) Companies listed on the Taiwan Stock Exchange (TWSE), Taiwan’s main stock market, saw their combined net profit rise more than 70% in 2021 from a year earlier to reach a record high, according to the stock market.

In a statement, the TWSE said the 883 Taiwanese companies and 76 foreign listed companies totaled NT$5.02 trillion ($176 billion) in overall pre-tax income, up 74.03% from to the previous year.

The record profits were largely driven by strong performance by companies in the shipping, semiconductor and finance/insurance sectors, the statement said.

Shipping lines have benefited from soaring freight rates amid global port congestion and supply shortages exacerbated by the COVID-19 pandemic.

Among profitable shipping companies, Evergreen Marine Corp., the largest containerized cargo shipper in Taiwan, recorded net income of NT$239 billion, up 880% from a year earlier, while rival Wan Hai Lines Ltd. saw its net income soar 813% to NT$103.34 billion.

The semiconductor industry has capitalized on the booming home economy amid COVID-19 and growing demand for emerging technologies such as 5G applications, high-performance computing devices and automotive electronics, according to the TWSE press release.

Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co. (TSMC), the world’s largest contact chip maker, posted record net profit of NT$596.54 billion in 2021, up 15.2% year-on-year former.

Smartphone IC designer MediaTek Inc. set its own record with net income of NT$111.87 billion, up 170% from a year earlier.

Companies in the financial services sector benefited from the growth in loans as well as the boom in global capital markets, which boosted their investment performance.

Fubon Financial Holding Co. was Taiwan’s most profitable financial holding company with net income of NT$144.6 billion in 2021, up 60.1% from the previous year, and earnings per share of NT$12.49.

Cathay Financial Holding Co. came in second with net profit of NT$140.57 billion, up 85% year-on-year, and EPS of NT$10.32.

In 2021, TWSE-listed companies generated NT$37.32 trillion in combined revenue, up 15.66 percent from a year earlier, the TWSE said.

Meanwhile, the 793 companies listed on the over-the-counter (OTC) market totaled NT$322.4 billion in aggregate pre-tax revenue in 2021, up 41% from a year earlier, according to the Taipei Stock Exchange (TPEx), which operates the OTC market. .

Of the 739 companies, 68% reported higher pre-tax earnings, and the overall double-digit profit growth largely reflected strong gains in the semiconductor, electronics and electronics sectors. steel, said the TPEx.

Listed companies earned NT$2.65 trillion in sales revenue in 2021, up 17 percent from a year earlier, TPEx said.

(By Pan Chih-yi, Han Ting-ting and Frances Huang)

End article/s

Automotive Rear View System Market Revenue, Growth Factors, Trends, Key Companies, Forecast to 2028

0

Reports and data

A global research report titled Automotive Rear Vision System Market has been recently published by Reports and Data to provide guidance to businesses

NEW YORK, NY, USA, April 1, 2022 /EINPresswire.com/ — A global research report titled Automotive Rear-View System market was recently released by Reports and Data to provide guidance to businesses. The report also focuses on global major major industry players of Automotive Rear View Mirror System market providing information such as company profiles, product picture and specification, price, capacity, cost, production, income and contact details. The global automotive backup systems market is expected to grow at a substantial CAGR in the coming years. The most important factor driving the growth of this market is the increase in investment in the market. Investments in the automotive rear view system market have witnessed enormous growth over the past few years. This report also states import and export consumption, supply and demand Figures, cost, price, revenue and gross margins.

Reports and Data has announced the addition of new informative data titled Automotive Rear Vision System Market to its extensive repository. The objective of this report is to help readers improve their industry performance by focusing on important aspects of their business, such as recent developments, technology platforms, and various standard operating procedures and tools. . Both primary and secondary research techniques were used to effectively examine the desired data. Analysts in this research report can quickly expand their business by focusing on various business and market strategies.

Main key players:

Magna International Inc., Samvardhana Motherson Reflectec (SMR), Ichikoh Industries Ltd., Lumax Automotive Systems Ltd., SL Corporation, Murakami Corporation, Gentex Corporation, Flabeg Automotive Holding GmbH, Ficosa Internacional SA, Burco Inc., Valeo SA, Sichuan Skay -View and Shanghai Lvxiang are major players in the global market.

Get Sample Report @ https://www.reportsanddata.com/sample-enquiry-form/967

Market Overview:

The automobile industry began in the 1860s and is now considered one of the largest industries in the world in terms of revenue. The market plays a vital role in the human development and economic growth of any country in terms of GDP, employment, government revenue generation, infrastructure construction and industrial production. The integration of artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning (ML), predictive technology and the use of augmented reality (AR) in automobiles enables the implementation of autonomous driving functions and accident prevention. This convergence of digital technology and changing customer demands is revolutionizing the automotive industry to innovate automotive brands.

The regional analysis covers:

North America (United States, Canada, Mexico)
Europe (Italy, UK, Germany, France, Rest of Europe)
Asia-Pacific (India, China, Japan, South Korea, Australia, rest of APAC)
Latin America (Chile, Brazil, Argentina, Peru, rest of Latin America)
Middle East and Africa (Saudi Arabia, United Arab Emirates, South Africa, Rest of MEA)

In addition to business strategy, the Automotive Rear View Mirror Market throws light on different properties to restrain fuel or industry advancement. More emphasis is placed on applicable sales strategies to increase business productivity in order to achieve higher economic performance. It also covers research and development activities, online and offline activities, latest product launches and some of the competitive expansion adopted by major global companies. Research reports use effective graphical presentation techniques such as tables, graphs, charts, diagrams, and infographics.

The main highlights of the Automotive Rear View System Market report:

In-depth research of growth patterns, market size and share, leading companies and key segments of the global Automotive Rear View Mirror System market
In-depth information on market trends, drivers, restraining factors, product segmentation and industry chain analysis
In-depth regional analysis and competitive landscape
Key statistical data organized in tables, graphs, figures and other graphical representations
SWOT analysis and Porter’s five forces analysis for each key player

To know more about the report @ https://www.reportsanddata.com/report-detail/automotive-rear-view-system-market

Contents:

Global Automotive Rearview System Market Overview
Economic impact on industry
Market competition by manufacturers
Production, revenue (value) by region
Analysis of market effect factors
Industrial Chain, Sourcing Strategy and Downstream Buyers
Supply (production), consumption, export, import by regions
Production, Revenue (Value), Price Trend by Type
Global Automotive Rear View System Market Forecast
Global Automotive Rear View Mirror System Market Analysis by Application
Manufacturing cost analysis
Marketing Strategy Analysis, Distributors/Traders
Research Finding/Conclusion
appendix

Request Report Customization @ https://www.reportsanddata.com/request-customization-form/967

Thank you for reading our report. We also offer customized report according to customer requirements. Please contact us to know more about the customization plan and our team will offer you the modified report.

Browse more reports-

https://www.prnewswire.co.uk/news-releases/field-service-management-market-size-to-reach-usd-23-46-bn-in-2030-due-to-increasing-preference- to-exclude-paper-processes-in-field-service-operations-associated-with-increasing-technology-upgrading- to-increase-business-efficiency-reports-a-819007060.html

https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/field-service-management-market-size-to-reach-usd-23-46-bn-in-2030-due-to-increasing-preference-for- excluding-paper-processes-in-field-service-operations-associated-with-increasing-technology-upgrading-to- increase-business-efficiency-301510710.html

https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/vehicle-telematics-market-size-to-reach-usd-232-88-billion-in-2030–reports-and-data-301512793.html

Tushar Rajput
Reports and data
+1 212-710-1370
write to us here
Visit us on social media:
Facebook
Twitter
LinkedIn

Dominion agrees to study the viability of the Wise power plant which does not produce much electricity

0

With a coal plant costing taxpayers millions but not producing much electricity, Dominion Energy agreed to carry out an analysis how it could make the Virginia City Hybrid Energy Center in Wise County economically viable in the future.

“The company has recognized that the economics of the station are currently in question,” attorney Joseph Reid told a State Corporation Commission hearing in January.

The Virginia Chapter of the Sierra Club pointed to the plant’s losses – the utility’s own estimates indicate it will cost ratepayers at least $472 million by the end of the decade and produce only 6, 3% of the electricity it is able to generate – as a reason why the facility is expected to be closed in 2023.

“The company’s own analysis shows that VCHEC, if it continues to operate, will continue to lose money,” Rachel Wilson, a Synapse Energy Economics consultant hired by Sierra Club Virginia, said in a November filing. “Dominion is knowingly asking its ratepayers to subsidize the unprofitable operation of VCHEC, perhaps for another 20 plus years.”

But Dominion argued that economics is “only one of several factors affecting the prudence of a power plant’s continued operation.”

Virginia City “is a unique generating facility designed not only to provide cost-effective electricity generation, but to meet certain legislative policy objectives and improve system reliability,” wrote Dominion Director of Integrated Strategic Planning, Glenn Kelly, in a December filing.

“By design, these goals should factor into the calculation of the continued operation of VCHEC alongside economic considerations,” he continued.

In January, Dominion reached an agreement with staff from the Sierra Club and the State Corporation Commission to conduct an analysis of “a possible path to economic viability” for VCHEC. Crown Corporations Commission judges approved it on February 23, giving Dominion nine months to complete its review.

In addition to asking the utility to evaluate whether the plant should be removed sooner, the final order asks Dominion to analyze other uses for the facility, including as a site for solar, wind or energy storage.

Under the terms of the agreement, the utility is to suspend any major capital expenditures at the plant until the report is complete “and a long-term decision regarding the continued operation of VCHEC has been made.” by the company”.

For State Corporation Commission judges charged with regulating Virginia’s electric utilities and who routinely must approve major investments in VCHEC and Dominion’s right to recover those costs from customers, the question is whether the benefits that the central provides exceed its costs to captive ratepayers.

This calculation is complicated by the fact that Virginia City was built outside Dominion service territory. Proponents of the plant point to the important jobs and income it provides to southwest Virginia and the fact that it burns waste coal mined from so-called gob piles, piles of previously unusable coal and mining by-products that are strewn across the coal country. But the region does not bear the costs of the plant – those are borne by Dominion customers in the eastern and central parts of the state.

At a hearing in January, CSC’s senior hearing examiner, Michael Thomas, divided the plant’s problems into what he called “the good, the bad and the ugly.”

The good, he said, was the economic and environmental benefits the city of Virginia offers, as well as its stringent air emissions controls – “It’s the newest, cleanest coal-fired plant in operation. in Virginia,” he said. “It’s a fact.”

But the problem, he said, is that “we have a facility that was designed and built to run 80% of the year and it runs somewhere in the teens.” And the worst part is that VCHEC is losing hundreds of millions of dollars.

“Now is it ugly or is it really ugly?” He asked. “This discussion needs to be in your report.”

Dominion Energy’s Virginia City Hybrid Energy Center in Wise County, Virginia, 2019. (Sarah Vogelsong/Virginia Mercury)

Decarbonization and Virginia’s Youngest Coal Plant

The Virginia City plant has been controversial since its inception, but has come under fire more recently due to the state’s ambitious decarbonization goals, which require the power sector to be carbon-free by the middle of the century.

While an earlier version of Virginia’s landmark Clean Economy Act of 2020 would have required VCHEC to be closed by 2030, pressure from Southwest Virginia lawmakers got an amendment allowing it to stay open until 2045.

Of the. Terry Kilgore, R-Scott, who is now House Majority Leader, was the only Republican in the House to vote for the Clean Economy Act, a move he explained as the outcome of the negotiated close date for VCHEC.

Kilgore proposed a bill in the 2022 session which, among many provisions, would have prohibited VCHEC from being required to close before “the end of its useful life”. The language was later removed from the final version of the legislation.

For the Southwest Virginia coal region, which has long lagged the rest of the state in employment, income, and other economic measures, VCHEC looms large. The plant employs 167 full-time and contract workers and pays about $8.5 million a year in taxes to Wise County. Dominion says that in total, VCHEC provides “between $25 million and $100 million annually in regional economic benefits.”

“Behind the facts and figures of VCHEC’s contributions to the local economy are employees with good jobs and crucial funding for schools, law enforcement and other public services,” the senator said. Todd Pillion, R-Abingdon, in a letter to the State Corporation. Committee.

Southwest Virginia and Dominion lawmakers also point to the role VCHEC plays in cleaning up gob coal, which can be a major pollutant in waterways. Dominion says the plant has cleaned more than 4 million tonnes of gob since it went into operation in 2012, with around 10 million tonnes remaining in the region.

Will Payne, Regional Marketing Campaign Manager Invest SWVA, argued in a letter to regulators that clearing gob piles is necessary to clean up land “to robustly locate solar, storage and wind assets. in coalfields” as well as commercial and industrial sites.

“Southwest Virginia’s economy will not grow and diversify without VCHEC in operation to permanently phase out gob coal,” he wrote.

But while there has been little dispute over VCHEC’s impact on water quality, its impact on air quality and carbon footprint remain issues for environmental groups.

Even when operating at low capacity, the plant accounts for more than 4% of the state’s annual carbon emissions, according to emissions figures from the Regional Greenhouse Gas Initiative’s online carbon allowance tracking system.

In addition to the economic and environmental arguments, Dominion argued that keeping VCHEC running is critical to ensuring electrical reliability and that customers will bear high costs if the plant is shut down early anyway.

“The commission could determine an amortization period during which the company would recover from customers these prudently incurred costs,” the utility wrote in a filing, “but regardless of the length of the recovery period, the costs will be significant.”

Still, regulatory staff have expressed skepticism about whether keeping the plant running makes financial sense. Over time, facilities require costly capital investments to offset routine wear and tear, while environmental regulations increasingly impose a price on carbon emissions, making burning coal for electricity more expensive.

“Given the regulatory climate at the state and federal levels regarding greenhouse gas emissions, including carbon dioxide, and environmental regulations such as RGGI,” wrote utility analyst David Dalton, “it It may not be advisable to pursue capital investment in a unit that the business analysis shows is not profitable to continue operating.

Nevertheless, he noted that economic viability is not the only problem to be solved.

“Retiring a unit, especially a coal unit, is not a decision to be taken lightly or rushed,” he wrote.

Russia steps up economic retaliation with offer to buy Eurobond ruble

0

A view shows Russian ruble coins in this illustration taken October 26, 2018. Picture taken October 26, 2018. REUTERS/Maxim Shemetov

Join now for FREE unlimited access to Reuters.com

Register

  • Eurobond ruble payment offer reignites default fears
  • Moscow does not say whether bondholders should take rubles
  • Russia has already demanded gas payments in rubles
  • The move may help residents facing dollar payment restrictions

LONDON, March 29 (Reuters) – Russia retaliated on Tuesday to what it called an “economic war” with the West by offering to buy back its $2 billion Eurobonds due next month in rubles rather than dollars.

The Finance Ministry’s bid for Eurobonds maturing on April 4, Russia’s biggest debt payment this year, follows Western moves to toughen sanctions on the country following its invasion of Russia. Ukraine and to freeze Moscow from international finance.

Moscow, which calls its actions in Ukraine a “special military operation”, said the Western measures amounted to “economic warfare”. In response, he has already asked foreign companies to pay for Russian gas in rubles rather than dollars or euros. Read more

Join now for FREE unlimited access to Reuters.com

Register

It was not immediately clear whether bondholders would be forced to accept rubles if they rejected the offer, a move that would break the terms of the bond and again raise the prospect of the first external sovereign default by Russia in a century.

Creditors said it could be aimed at helping Russian holders who now face restrictions on receiving dollar payments.

“This is a tender offer and not a final decision that these bonds will be paid in rubles. Perhaps the Russian authorities want to assess investors’ willingness to accept payment in rubles? ” said Seaport Global credit analyst Himanshu Porwal.

Tim Ash of BlueBay Asset Management, which is not a bondholder, said the move was part of a response by Russia’s central bank and finance ministry “to avoid defaults and stabilize the markets and the rouble”.

Ash said the US Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC), which enforces US sanctions, “should make it clear” that it will not extend the May 25 deadline for US persons or entities to receive payments on Russian sovereign bonds.

Russia’s Finance Ministry said in its statement on Tuesday that bondholders should submit requests to sell their holdings to the National Settlement Depository between 1:00 p.m. GMT on March 29 and 2:00 p.m. GMT on March 30.

SECURE PAYMENT

Eurobonds would be bought at a price equivalent to 100% of their face value, he said.

A fund manager said the ministry’s offer could be designed to help Russian investors secure their payments because Euroclear, an international settlement system, had blocked dollar payments to the Russian clearing system.

“Everyone wants dollars right now – inside and outside Russia – so I guess only local holders and local banks that have problems with sanctions will use this operation,” he said. Kaan Nazli, portfolio manager at Neuberger Berman, which recently reduced its exposure to Russian sovereign debt.

Nazli, who said he had never seen a buyout that changed the redemption currency, added that foreign investors were unlikely to be interested given that the ruble ‘is no longer a convertible currency’ .

The ruble first crashed after the West imposed sanctions, plunging up to 40% in value against the dollar since the start of 2022. It has since recovered and was trading around 10% in Moscow on Tuesday.

The Ministry of Finance did not provide a breakdown of foreign and Russian holders of Eurobond-2022. He did not respond to a request about how much of the remaining $2 billion he wanted to buy back or what would happen if investors turned down the offer.

The bond has a 30-day grace period and no provision for alternate currency payments, JPMorgan said.

According to the Refinitiv eMAXX database, which analyzes public filings, major asset managers such as Brandywine, Axa, Morgan Stanley Investment Management, BlackRock were recently among the holders of the bond maturing on April 4.

The Finance Ministry said earlier on Tuesday that it had fully paid a $102 million coupon on Russia’s Eurobond due in 2035, its third payment since Western sanctions challenged Moscow’s ability to deliver. service of its foreign currency debt.

Repayments of Russian sovereign debt have so far been made, avoiding a default, although the sanctions have frozen some of Moscow’s huge foreign exchange reserves. Russian officials have said any payment issues that result in a formal declaration of default would be an artificial default.

Russia’s next payment will be on March 31, when a payment of $447 million will fall due. On April 4, it is also expected to pay $84 million in coupon for a 2042 dollar sovereign bond. Read more

Join now for FREE unlimited access to Reuters.com

Register

Reuters reporting; Written by Edmund Blair; Editing by Alexander Smith and Carmel Crimmins

Our standards: The Thomson Reuters Trust Principles.

Post record Rs 1.1 trn FY22 IPO fundraising, next fiscal could set new record

0

Web-exclusive

54 companies plan to raise Rs 1.4 trillion in FY23 after 52 Indian companies raised an all-time high of Rs 1.11 trillion through initial public offerings (IPOs) in FY23 22, according to Prime Database report

Topics
IPO of LIC | IPO | IPO in India


Puneet Wadhwa |
New Delhi


After a successful financial year 2021-2022 (FY22) in which 52 Indian companies raised an all-time high of Rs 1.11 trillion through initial public offerings (IPOs), the momentum may well continue in the in FY23 and the amount raised could exceed FY22.

According to a note from Prime Database, 54 companies plan to raise a massive Rs 1.4 trillion (including the highly anticipated IPO of LIC) and currently hold approval from the market regulator Securities and Exchange Board of India (Sebi). According to the note, 43 other companies are looking to raise around Rs 81,000 crore where Sebi’s approval still stands…




MONTHLY STAR

Enterprise Standard Digital


Business Standard Digital Monthly Subscription

Full access to premium product

Convenient – Pay as you go

Pay with Amex/Master/VISA credit cards and VISA debit cards only

Automatic renewal (subject to authorization by your card issuer)

Cancel anytime in the future

Requires personal information

What do you get?

ON THE STANDARD DIGITAL OF COMPANIES

  • Unlimited access to all content on any device via browser or app.
  • Exclusive content, features, opinions and reviews – handpicked by our editors, just for you.
  • Choose 5 of your favorite companies. Receive a daily email with all updates about them.
  • Follow the industry of your choice with a daily newsletter specific to that industry.
  • Keep control of your investments. Follow the prices of the stocks in your portfolio.
  • 18 years of archival data.

REMARK :

  • The product is a monthly auto-renewing product.
  • Cancellation policy: You can cancel anytime in the future without giving a reason, but 48 hours before your card is charged for renewal. We do not offer refunds.
  • To cancel, communicate from your registered email id and send the email with the cancellation request to [email protected] Include your contact number for quick action. Requests mailed to any other ID will not be acknowledged or processed.

SMART ANNUAL

Enterprise Standard Digital
Subscribe now and get 12 months free


Business Standard Premium Digital – 12 months + 12 months free

Subscribe for 12 months and get 12 months free.

One-time, transparent registration for Business Standard Digital

Convenient – Payment once a year

Pay using an instrument of your choice – all credit and debit cards, Net Banking, payment wallets and UPI

Exclusive invitation to select Business Standard events

What you get

ON THE STANDARD DIGITAL OF COMPANIES

  • Unlimited access to all content on any device via browser or app.
  • Exclusive content, features, opinions and reviews – handpicked by our editors, just for you.
  • Choose 5 of your favorite companies. Receive a daily email with all updates about them.
  • Follow the industry of your choice with a daily newsletter specific to that industry.
  • Keep control of your investments. Follow the prices of the stocks in your portfolio.

REMARK :

  • The monthly term product is an auto-renewal based product. Once subscribed, subject to your card issuer’s authorization, we will automatically charge your card/payment instrument each month and renew your subscription.
  • In the annual term product, we offer both an auto-renewal based product and a non-auto-renewal based product.
  • We do not refund.
  • No Questions Asked Cancellation Policy.
  • You can cancel future renewals at any time, including immediately after your subscription, but 48 hours before your next renewal date.
  • Subject to the above, cancel yourself by visiting the “Manage My Account” section after logging in OR send an email request to [email protected] from your registered email address and stating your mobile phone number.


Dear reader,

Business Standard has always endeavored to provide up-to-date information and commentary on developments that matter to you and that have wider political and economic implications for the country and the world. Your constant encouragement and feedback on how to improve our offering has only strengthened our resolve and commitment to these ideals. Even in these challenging times stemming from Covid-19, we remain committed to keeping you informed and updated with credible news, authoritative opinions and incisive commentary on relevant topical issues.
However, we have a request.

As we battle the economic impact of the pandemic, we need your support even more so that we can continue to bring you more great content. Our subscription model has received an encouraging response from many of you who have subscribed to our online content. More subscription to our online content can only help us achieve the goals of bringing you even better and more relevant content. We believe in free, fair and credible journalism. Your support through more subscriptions can help us practice the journalism we are committed to.

Support quality journalism and subscribe to Business Standard.

digital editor

First published: Monday, March 28, 2022. 10:52 a.m. IST

Alpha V Integrin Market Size, Development Data, Growth Analysis and Forecast 2022 to 2028

0

The Global Alpha V Integrin Market The report emphasizes on a detailed understanding of some crucial factors such as size, share, sales, forecasted trends, supply, production, demand, industry, and CAGR to provide a comprehensive perspective of the overall market. In addition, the report also highlights challenges impeding market growth and expansion strategies utilized by leading companies in the “Integratin Alpha V Market”.

Global Integrin Alpha V market research report analyzes leading players in key regions such as North America, South America, Middle East and Africa, Asia-Pacific. Provides insights and expert analysis on important market trends and consumer behaviors, as well as insights into key market data and brands. It also provides all the easily digestible information.

Get Sample Full PDF Copy of Report: (Including Full TOC, List of Tables & Figures, Chart) @ https://reportsglobe.com/download-sample/?rid=105470

The authors of the report draw up an encyclopedic assessment of the most important regional markets and their evolution in recent years. Readers are provided with accurate facts and figures on the Integrin Alpha V market and its important factors such as consumption, production, revenue growth, and CAGR. The report also shares gross margin, market share, attractiveness index, and value and volume growth for all segments studied by analysts. It highlights key developments, product portfolio, markets served and other areas depicting business growth of major companies profiled in the report.

The report has been prepared using the latest primary and secondary research methods and tools. Our analysts rely on government documents, white papers, press releases, reliable investor information, financial and quarterly reports, and public and private interviews to gather data and information about the market in which they operate.

Key Players Covered in the Integrin Alpha V Markets:

  • Biogene Inc
  • SciFluor Life Sciences LLC
  • MedImmune LLC
  • BioMAS Ltd
  • Morphic Therapeutics Inc
  • Factor Therapeutics Ltd
  • Merck KGaA
  • Merck & Co Inc.
  • Vascular Pharmaceuticals Inc.

    Integrin Alpha V Market Split By Type:

  • MK-0429
  • C-16Y
  • 264-RAD
  • AC-301
  • Others

    Integrin Alpha V Market Split By Application:

  • Metabolic disorders
  • Ophthalmology
  • Respiratory
  • Infectious disease
  • Others

    The Integrin Alpha V market report has been segregated into distinct categories such as product type, application, end-user, and region. Each segment is rated based on CAGR, participation, and growth potential. In the regional analysis, the report highlights the potential region, which is expected to generate opportunities in the global Keyword Market in the coming years. This segment analysis is sure to prove to be a useful tool for readers, stakeholders, and market players to get a complete picture of the global Keyword Market and its growth potential in the coming years.

    Get | Discount on the purchase of this report @ https://reportsglobe.com/ask-for-discount/?rid=105470

    Scope of the Integrin Alpha V Market Report

    ATTRIBUTES

    The description

    ESTIMATED YEAR

    2022

    YEAR OF REFERENCE

    2021

    FORECAST YEAR

    2022 to 2028

    HISTORICAL YEAR

    2020

    SECTORS COVERED

    Types, applications, end users, and more.

    REPORT COVER

    Revenue Forecast, Business Ranking, Competitive Landscape, Growth Factors and Trends

    BY REGION

    North America, Europe, Asia-Pacific, Latin America, Middle East and Africa

    Geographic segment covered in the report:

    The Integrin Alpha V report provides information on the market area, which is divided into sub-regions and countries/regions. In addition to the market share in each country and sub-region, this chapter of this report also contains information on profit opportunities. This chapter of the report mentions the market share and the growth rate for each region, country and sub-region during the estimated period.

    • North America includes the United States, Canada and Mexico
    • Europe includes Germany, France, UK, Italy, Spain
    • South America includes Colombia, Argentina, Nigeria and Chile
    • Asia Pacific includes Japan, China, Korea, India, Saudi Arabia and Southeast Asia

    Aims and Objectives of the Integrin Alpha V Market Research

    • Understanding the opportunities and advancements of Integrin Alpha V determines the market strengths, along with the key regions and countries involved in the market growth.
    • Study the various segments of the Integrin Alpha V market and the dynamics of Integrin Alpha V in the market.
    • To categorize the Integrin Alpha V segments with increasing growth potential and assess the futuristic segment market.
    • To analyze the most important trends related to the different segments which help decrypt and convince the Integrin Alpha V market.
    • Check region-specific growth and development in the Integrin Alpha V Market.
    • To understand the major Integrin Alpha V market players and the competitive image value of the Integrin Alpha V market leaders.
    • To study the key plans, initiatives, and strategies for the development of the Alpha V Integrin Market.

    The study thoroughly examines the profiles of major market players and their key financial aspects. This comprehensive business analysis report is useful for all new and existing participants when designing their business strategies. This report covers KEYWORD production, revenue, market share and growth rate for each key company and covers the breakdown data (production, consumption, revenue and market share) by regions, type and applications. Integrin Alpha V historical breakdown data from 2016-2021 and forecast for 2022-2028.

    Ask questions about personalization at @ https://reportsglobe.com/need-customization/?rid=105470

    Some highlights from the table of contents:

    1 Presentation of the report

    2 Market Trends and Competitive Landscape

    3 Alpha V Integrin Market Segmentation by Types

    4 Integrin Alpha V Market Segmentation by End Users

    5 Market Analysis by Major Regions

    6 Commodities of Alpha V Integrin Market by Major Countries

    7 North America Integrin Alpha V Landscape Analysis

    8 Europe Integrin Alpha V Landscape Analysis

    9 Asia-Pacific Integrin Alpha V Landscape Analysis

    10 Latin America, Middle East and Africa Integrin Alpha V Landscape Analysis

    11 Profile of Key Players

    How Reports Globe is different from other market research providers:

    The creation of Reports Globe has been underpinned by providing clients with a holistic view of market conditions and future possibilities/opportunities to derive maximum benefit from their business and assist in decision making. Our team of in-house analysts and consultants work tirelessly to understand your needs and provide the best possible solutions to meet your research needs.

    Our team at Reports Globe follows a rigorous data validation process, which allows us to publish publisher reports with minimal or no deviation. Reports Globe collects, separates and publishes over 500 reports each year covering products and services in many areas.

    Contact us:

    Mr. Mark Williams

    Account Manager

    WE: +1-970-672-0390

    E-mail: [email protected]

    Website: Reportsglobe.com

  • Small Cannabis Retailers Try to Carve Out a Footprint in Santa Fe’s Burgeoning Cannabis Industry | Local News

    0

    Ian Aarons has long had a strong fascination with cannabis, but as the state’s long-running push to legalize the product became a reality last year, it took his interest in a whole new direction.

    It was once just a hobby; he grew a few plants while in college under a private medicinal grower license. Aarons, 26, now plans to make a living with marijuana as the managing director of Endo, a full-fledged Santa Fe cannabis business he helped start with a few family members.

    They are looking to put the finishing touches on renovations to a two-story building on the corner of Agua Fría Street and Siler Street, where they plan to grow and sell cannabis products. They are part of a new generation of entrepreneurs trying to gain a foothold in a nascent industry where challenges abound and more experienced operators know the terrain.

    “Times were changing,” Aarons said of the decision. “It was just a hobby, but we decided, let’s go and see if we can make some money.”

    The family initially invested $500,000 in the business, but as work continued, it became increasingly clear to Aarons that plans to open by Friday, the first day cannabis can be legally sold for recreational purposes in New Mexico, would not materialize.

    Aarons attributes the late opening to the difficulty of finding a location in Santa Fe’s tight commercial real estate market, as well as the work still to be done to renovate Endo’s facilities and the complex interplay between state and local regulations.

    The storefront and production area just received state approvals last Sunday, said Stephen Aarons, Ian Aaron’s father and the company’s general counsel.

    Although the arrival of legalized cannabis has been anticipated since its passage last year by the Legislative Assembly, the number of new retailers is low. According to the state’s Cannabis Control Division website, only three have been approved by the state of Santa Fe. Endo is the only one with plans to open a retail facility soon.

    The inability to expedite the opening process left Endo in a position where it had to decide whether to “roll the dice and get to work” or wait for its licenses to be approved, Ian Aarons said.

    “We should have 100 things going right and zero things going wrong to open by April 1,” he said.

    When legal recreational cannabis sales officially begin statewide, it’s probably just a handful of “legacy” vendors in Santa Fe.

    — grandfathered medical marijuana retailers in the recreational cannabis program — will be able to begin selling the product Friday morning.

    But Aarons thinks there will be a place in the market for smaller mom and pop retailers like Endo, even if they have to engage in some catch-up play.

    “There will always be Walmarts,” he said, referring to the 34 largest cannabis retail companies that have been favored in recreational cannabis sales. “But it’s up to us to be this Marble Brewing Company, this local craftsmanship.”

    Endo is expected to begin developing its product in a 10,000 square foot building at 2903 Agua Fría Street later this month. The structure will have space to process plants, as well as a retail display.

    He said the company’s local flair and desire to deliver a consistent high-quality product will help further separate Endo as the market continues to mature.

    But he acknowledges the difficulties startups like Endo face just opening doors, especially compared to larger retailers who likely have the legal resources and industry means to complete the process in a timely manner.

    He said the entrepreneurs were entering a business that medical retailers discovered more than 10 years ago.

    “That’s the problem, for these moms and dads, it’s hard. … You have to find a niche,” he said. “In my opinion, New Mexico is really locally driven. We like to see guys we grew up with with start-ups; we’re not always thrilled to see a big New York company come to town.

    Endo – Latin for “inside” – is a decidedly local family outfit.

    After earning a master’s degree in business administration from the University of New Mexico last spring, Aarons recruited her mother, longtime Santa Fe resident Doris Valdez, to serve as president of the company, and his cousin, Alex Costello, to work as technical director.

    Aarons’ father, Stephen Aarons, is a criminal defense attorney in Santa Fe. He focuses on licensing and regulation.

    Stephen Aarons acknowledged the irony of a criminal defense attorney getting into the cannabis business, but said since college he has had a more liberal view of the product.

    Stephen Aarons said his son first approached him – or, as Ian Aarons puts it, “nagged him” – about getting into the medical cannabis business a few years ago, but has said it seemed too “political” to get into the business.

    “There were jokes about how I’ve been in criminal cases with drugs and now I’ve kind of joined in,” Stephen Aarons said with a laugh. “But my son got an MBA, so he wants to do business, and it’s going to be a hot business and should pay off for him. They’ve really worked hard.

    Marijuana Business Daily, a Colorado-based cannabis website, estimates cannabis sales in New Mexico will grow from $125 million in 2022 to $400 million per year by 2026.

    About 40% is expected to come from out-of-state buyers — namely Texans, said Duke Rodriguez, CEO of Ultra Health, the state’s largest cannabis company. the new mexican Last year.

    Stephen Aarons said having a lawyer on the team is an obvious boon to Endo, particularly when it comes to navigating the complicated web of local and state regulations; each municipality was able to put in place its own rules guiding recreational cannabis.

    “Your average guy trying to start a business is going to have a really hard time doing it,” he said.

    To be approved by the state, a company must obtain a license from its local jurisdiction or prove that it will have one before beginning operations. It must also comply with local zoning ordinances.

    The city of Santa Fe has a cannabis business license, but before anyone can apply for one, a state approval letter must be obtained – along with city zoning approvals. A company should also provide a water balance sheet, along with details of how waste will be disposed of and expected energy use.

    The state also requires retailers to provide a social and economic equity plan, proof of age for each controlling person, background check authorization form, and premises design.

    Ian Aarons said the process sometimes seemed almost circular, and the city’s director of land use, Jason Kluck, acknowledged the tricky interplay between state and local governments — noting a sort of back-and-forth -comes almost “chicken and egg” between the two entities.

    “They are not beholden to our process, and we are not beholden to theirs,” he said, referring to the state. “We’re trying to work with them to clean up this process, just like every municipality in the state.”

    “It’s not a Santa Fe problem,” he added. “It is a state problem.

    Kluck said the city has approved about 23 retailers, most of them legacy entities. The city has also issued a “ton” of approvals for growers and manufacturers, he said.

    Stephen Aarons wondered if the process had stopped others from getting into the cannabis business.

    “I do criminal defense, so I’m not exactly a business lawyer,” he said. “But I have a big advantage over someone who doesn’t have a law degree or something. You just have to put together what they want, that’s where it’s so hard to get approved things.

    Heather Brewer, spokeswoman for the Cannabis Control Division, was on vacation Friday and did not respond to an email seeking comment.

    Ian Aarons said a lack of available locations in Santa Fe that matched zoning requirements – combined with the stigma that cannabis businesses carry for some landlords – made finding the right building “almost impossible”.

    “It’s actually very impressive that we found a building,” he said.

    Ian Aarons said he plans to start selling the company’s product at least four months after the facility’s four grow rooms are completed (a cannabis plant can take four to eight months to mature). Endo is expected to have to rely on wholesale cannabis sellers after the storefront opens, but Stephen Aarons has expressed concern about the amount of product available.

    Stephen Aarons added that he thinks wholesale cannabis growers are holding onto more of their supply to see how the market takes shape in the first few weeks, which will likely affect how much product retailers can buy.

    In an interview last week, Kristen Thomson, director of the state’s Cannabis Enforcement Division, said the state has no concerns about the amount of product available, saying there are more ‘one million mature plants in the statewide tracking system designed to calculate plants. growth.

    The figure has been criticized by some of the state’s largest cannabis producers.

    But the Aarons are confident that despite a few roadblocks and concerns about available products, their business will welcome customers on May Day.

    At present only family and a few contractors are working on the building, but Ian Aarons hopes to hire at least 10 staff to help get Endo up and running once everything is up and running. There will be a few staff members to work at the grow sites, a few people to manage the showcase, and a security guard.

    He said he could probably run Endo with fewer people, but he didn’t want to put too much on the shoulders of a smaller staff.

    He expects to pay at least $15 an hour and said people have contacted him before about job opportunities.

    “I want it to be the kind of job where people are happy with their work,” he said. “I want this place to be a benefit to the community.”

    Kenyan banks record meteoric rise in profits

    0

    By JAMES ANYANZWA

    The Kenyan banking sector is optimistic as major banks announce huge profits and a record dividend payout to shareholders for the financial year ending December 31, in an economy struggling to recover from the shocks of the Covid-19 pandemic. 19.

    After a period of reduced net profits, massive layoffs and frozen dividends in 2020, Kenyan lenders have suddenly rebounded amid modest revenue growth and reduced operating expenses.

    So far, six leading banks have released their financial performance figures for the 12 months to December 31, averaging more than 80% growth in net profit.

    These were Absa Bank Kenya which recorded the largest increase in net profit of 161%, followed by Equity Bank (99%), KCB (74%), Standard Chartered Bank Kenya (66%), Co -operative Bank (53%) and Stanbic Holdings Ltd (39%).

    East Africa learned that inside the bright earnings numbers are huge write-backs on loan loss provisions that have been aggressively planned by bank managers looking to take advantage of the Covid-19 shocks to clean up their bad books in 2020.

    It is a process of restoring a provision for bad or bad debts previously made against profits and no longer needed after the commencement of loan execution.

    Advertising

    “There are two things at play here. The implementation of the International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS9) provided that banks should have more forward-looking provisions for doubtful and bad debts, which was to happen from the end of 2019. So when the Covid-19 came in, you realize the banks were having a drop in profitability because they were very aggressive in their procurement,” said an industry insider who did not want to be named. East Africa.

    “A lot of banks have taken advantage of the slowdown in economic growth during the Covid-19 period to do what’s called the ‘clean up’ book. So instead of posting very high profits at a time when the he economy is on its knees, they have been more aggressive in provisioning for bad debts and even more aggressive than the requirements of IFRS 9 which might be conservative in such circumstances.

    East Africa learned that the recovery of some of the bank loans that had been deemed bad and non-performing prompted lenders to drastically reduce provisions and increase profitability.

    “If these provisions did not lead to default, then there were huge reversals. So what you’re seeing is really the result of huge rewrites as a result of aggressive provisioning during the time of Covid-19,” the source said.

    East Africa understands that the jump in profitability is also due to the fact that the base year (2020) on which the comparison is made was a period in which lenders had experienced a sharp decline in profitability.

    “Remember that the Central Bank has also made some accommodations in terms of loan loss provisioning. It’s really what I can call a post-2020 baseline. So what you see if anyone one reports almost double profit this is largely due to what i would call the base effect where the base effect means the year (2020) you are measuring the growth against there has been a sharp reduction in profitability,” the source said.

    “So a lot of that represents what you see. If the loan portfolio does not increase, the only line from which profitability can increase is from repossessions. So those are the two factors that may explain the huge jump in earnings, but the main one is really the rewrite following aggressive provisioning that happened during the Covid-19 period.

    A study by analysts at AfricanFinancials shows that prior to the pandemic period, Kenyan banks had underfunded their bad debt books by an average of $248 million for five years before doubling it to $444 million in 2020 compared to $157 million in 2019.

    Analysts through a report titled Sub-Sahara Africa; December 2020 Bank Bad Debt Charge-Offs, Tracking Covid-19 provisionary provisioning, dated March 2021, indicates that East African and Mauritian banks overprovisioned bad and bad debts by $224 million in 2020.

    The increase in provisioning by Kenyan lenders during the Covid-19 period has also been compounded by the Central Bank granting flexibility to banks on loan classification and provisioning requirements for loans that were in default. current on March 2, 2020 and whose repayment period has been extended or have been restructured due to the pandemic.

    The one-year window in which lenders had extended and restructured loan repayments for clients affected by the pandemic expired on March 2, 2021, and borrowers had three months to regularize their loan repayments.

    According to the CBK, loans amounting to Ksh 1.7 trillion ($14.91 billion) were restructured during the period from March 3, 2020 to February 2021, accounting for 57% of the banking sector’s gross loans. In 2019, Kenyan banks started implementing IFRS 9 which requires them to make larger provisions for expected credit losses.

    Under IFRS9, which replaced International Accounting Standard (IAS) 39, banks are expected to provision for projected loan losses rather than those already incurred, which reduces their profitability and erodes their capital.

    Data from the Central Bank of Kenya shows that last year (2021) Kenyan banks conservatively sat on excess liquidity and reduced lending to key sectors of the economy to reduce default exposure payment and loan loss provisions in order to remain profitable.

    According to the central bank’s monthly statistical bulletin, banks only increased their lending by 2.25% ($121.92 million) to Ksh631.1 billion ($5.53 billion) in 2021, compared to 617.2 billion Ksh (5.41 billion dollars) in 2020.

    Banks also cut lending to agriculture and real estate by Ksh 11.9 billion ($104.38 million) and Ksh 30.1 billion ($264.03 million) respectively.

    The building and construction and private household sectors were also hard hit, with loans cut by Ksh 1.7 billion ($14.91 million) and Ksh 2 billion ($17.54 million). dollars) respectively.

    Banks also cut loans to the finance and insurance sector by 800 million Ksh ($7.01 million) and consumer durables by 900 million Ksh ($7.89 million). Total bank lending to government also slightly decreased by 5% ($171.05 million) to Ksh 380.3 billion ($3.33 billion) in 2021 from Ksh 399.8 billion. Ksh ($3.5 billion) in 2020, according to Central Bank data.

    The reduction in loans reduces the provision for loan losses in accordance with the requirements of IFRS 9.

    Global In-Person Learning Market Outlook to 2027

    0

    DUBLIN, March 25, 2022 /PRNewswire/ — The report “Global In-Person Learning Market by Course Type, By Application, By End User, By Regional Outlook, Industry Analysis Report and Forecast, 2021-2027” has been added. at from ResearchAndMarkets.com offer.

    The global in-person learning market size is expected to reach $44.08 billion by 2027, growing the market at 12.4% CAGR during the forecast period.

    In-person learning can be described as any form of teaching and learning that involves physical interaction between teachers and their students or students with their peers, in real time. In-person learning is the process that was used in times when the internet and technologies were not developed. During in-person learning, teachers and students experience educational interactions in physical classrooms for the purpose of extemporaneous and interactive learning.

    With in-person learning, teachers and professional trainers nurture their students’ knowledge by physically communicating with them. In-person learning is supposed to impart more knowledge and values ​​to students as it allows freedom of expressions and gestures, thus enhancing the overall personality of students.

    COVID-19 Impact Analysis

    In 2020, the in-person learning market has seen a huge drop due to the outbreak of one of the most dangerous viruses of the century. The contagious covid-19 has reached its peak and has affected markets and industries around the world. Government directives aimed at limiting the spread of the coronavirus have brought all factories, offices, retailers and other services to a hiatus.

    Educational institutions such as schools, colleges and training centers have all been closed. Covid-19 has deprived students of physical learning opportunities. Under such conditions of educational infrastructure across the globe, the in-person learning market has faced a giant drop. All institutes around the world have moved to e-learning models. Moreover, all schools and colleges have organized online exams for their students.

    Market Growth Factors:

    The flexible way to learn that adapts to all learning styles

    In-person learning is a format that accommodates different learning methods, as each child has a different base of understanding. Generally, learning styles are of four types viz. Visual, auditory, reading/writing and kinetics. Visual learners understand concepts better through visual information such as expressions, gestures, and demonstrations. These learners have the ability to retain information better by watching the proof of concept. Auditory learners have better listening skills, auditory learners can better understand ideas or topics through storytelling.

    Opportunities for extracurricular activities

    Extracurricular activities are an important part of learning. They offer students an opportunity to pursue their hobbies and passions further. In addition, they help them develop their skills and interests and allow them to pursue their ambitions. Nowadays, many educational institutions provide the facilities of sports clubs, cultural clubs and various other activities to their students. These activities also improve students’ mental health. Extracurricular activities allow students to expand their thinking potential by using their innovation as well as their social skills.

    Market Restraint Factor:

    Growing preference for online learning due to Covid-19

    In 2020, the world was suffering from one of the most dangerous pandemics in history, the coronavirus. The government was forced to shut down industries and all service sectors except necessary services. The closure also affected the education sector. All schools, colleges, universities and other educational institutions have been closed for a very long time. The shutdown of the education sector has given enormous popularity to online learning. During the pandemic, every educational institution delivered its courses and exams via the Internet.

    Course Type Outlook

    Based on course type, the in-person learning market is divided into academics, sports, arts and other types. The sports segment is a promising segment of the in-person learning market. Fitness is the latest trend in the new generation as many schools, colleges and universities are offering sports classes for their students. Additionally, many sports academies intend to promote and improve all-sports skills in their students and enable them to play from the zonal level to the international level.

    Application Outlook

    Based on application, the in-person learning market is divided into homeschooling and Cram School. Homeschooling offers students a convenient way to learn while staying at home. This method is usually preferred by students with disabilities or students who have low grades in school or other education and require special attention from the educator. It is also a practical practice for teachers to provide more personalized learning to students, either at their home or at the student’s home.

    End User Perspectives

    Based on end-user, the in-person learning market is segmented into college students, high school students, college students, and preschoolers. The preschool segment is expected to exhibit the fastest growth rate in the in-person learning market over the forecast years. One of the main reasons for the increased growth of this segment is the growing concern of parents to develop the basic skills of their children before they enter the real world.

    Regional outlook

    Based on regions, the market is segmented into North America, Europe, Asia Pacificand Latin America, Middle East & Africa. APAC has acquired a significant share of the overall market revenue. A key factor driving the growth of the regional market is an engaging and interactive atmosphere.

    The market research report covers the analysis of major market players. Major companies profiled in the report include Sylvan Learning, LLC (Franchise Group, Inc.), IXL Learning, Inc., Kaplan, Inc. (The Graham Holdings Company), INSEAD, BSC Education Ltd. (British Study Centres), Triumphant Institute Of Management Education Pvt. Ltd., ITS Education Asia, All A’s Academy and Eurocentres (Bayswater College Ltd.)

    Main topics covered:

    Chapter 1. Market Scope and Methodology

    Chapter 2. Market Overview
    2.1 Presentation
    2.1.1 Presentation
    2.1.1.1 Market composition and scenario
    2.2 Key Factors Impacting the Market
    2.2.1 Market Drivers
    2.2.2 Market constraints

    Chapter 3. Strategies deployed in the in-person learning market

    Chapter 4. Global In-Person Learning Market by Course Type
    4.1 Global Academics Market by Region
    4.2 Global Sports Market by Region
    4.3 Global Arts Market by Region
    4.4 Global Other Types Market by Region

    Chapter 5. Global In-Person Learning Market by Application
    5.1 Global Home Education In-Person Learning Market by Region
    5.2 Global Cram School In-Person Learning Market by Region

    Chapter 6. Global In-Person Learning Market by End User
    6.1 Global Student In-Person Learning Market by Region
    6.2 Global Secondary School Students Market by Region
    6.3 Global High School Students Market by Region
    6.4 Global Other End User Market by Region

    Chapter 7. Global In-Person Learning Market by Region

    Chapter 8. Business Profiles
    8.1 Sylvan Learning, LLC (Franchise Group, Inc.)
    8.1.1 Company Overview
    8.1.2 Financial analysis
    8.1.3 Segmental Analysis
    8.1.4 Strategies and recent developments:
    8.1.4.1 Geographic extensions:
    8.2 IXL Learning, Inc.
    8.2.1 Company overview
    8.2.2 Strategies and recent developments:
    8.2.2.1 Partnerships, collaborations and agreements:
    8.2.2.2 Product launches and product extensions:
    8.2.2.3 Acquisitions and Mergers:
    8.3 Kaplan, Inc. (The Graham Holdings Company)
    8.3.1 Company Overview
    8.3.2 Financial analysis
    8.3.3 Sectoral and regional analysis
    8.3.4 Strategies and recent developments:
    8.3.4.1 Partnerships, collaborations and agreements:
    8.4 INSEAD
    8.4.1 Company Overview
    8.4.2 Financial analysis
    8.4.3 Strategies and recent developments:
    8.4.3.1 Partnerships, collaborations and agreements:
    8.5 BSC Education Ltd. (British Study Centres)
    8.5.1 Company Overview
    8.5.2 Strategies and recent developments:
    8.5.2.1 Partnerships, collaborations and agreements:
    8.5.2.2 Acquisitions and Mergers:
    8.6 Triumphant Institute of Management Education Private Ltd.
    8.6.1 Company Overview
    8.7 ITS training ASIA
    8.7.1 Company Overview
    8.8 ACADEMY OF ALL A
    8.8.1 Company Overview
    8.9 Eurocentres (Bayswater College Ltd.)
    8.9.1 Company Overview

    For more information about this report visit https://www.researchandmarkets.com/r/u8h9gd

    Media Contact:

    Research and Markets
    Laura Woodsenior
    [email protected]

    For EST office hours, call +1-917-300-0470
    For USA/CAN call toll free +1-800-526-8630
    For GMT office hours call +353-1-416-8900

    US Fax: 646-607-1907
    Fax (outside the US): +353-1-481-1716

    SOURCE Research and Markets

    These fossil fuel companies have sent more than $15 billion in taxes to Russia since it annexed Crimea, NGOs say

    0
    They looked at royalties, export duties, bonuses, taxes and fees, as well as “government profit oil,” which includes the value of any actual oil the companies might have donated to Russia. He listed nine companies from those regions that had paid the most money to Russia. All of these payments were legal, and other multinational corporations outside the energy sector also made similar payments to the Russian state.
    Shell, which is registered in the UK, sent $7.85 billion, the highest amount of listed companies, the groups said in a statement, first shared with CNN. It was followed by the American company ExxonMobil (2.81 billion dollars). Two German-registered companies, Wintershall and Wintershall DEA, which have since merged, paid a combined total of $2.86 billion. BP, the British multinational oil and gas company, paid $817 million, according to Rystad data.

    The data was shared amid criticism that the West’s purchases of Russian coal, oil and gas – which are largely state-owned assets – helped fund the war of the Russia in Ukraine. The addition of taxes, fees and royalties for companies that have chosen to operate in Russia underscores the amount of capital Western energy companies have transferred to Russia.

    The three groups that compiled the data said that while the $15.8 billion figure was substantial, the companies identified were also responsible for tens of billions of additional dollars paid to the Russian state because of the stakes they hold in Russian oil and gas companies.

    BP until recently held a 19.75% stake in Russian energy company Rosneft, for example. Rosneft paid Russia $353.16 billion in oil taxes, royalties, royalties and profits between 2014 and 2021, according to Rystad data.

    While BP may not have paid that money directly to Russia, Murray Worthy, gas campaign manager at Global Witness, said he was still responsible for the payments.

    “The actual amount these companies are responsible for paying Russia is much closer to the $100 billion mark, but it’s obscured by their stakes in Russian companies. We believe BP alone is responsible for $78 billion. $.4 billion that goes to the Russian government through a stake in oil and gas giant Rosneft which he says he owned until just a few weeks ago,” he told CNN. It referred to payments made during the period between Russia’s annexation of Crimea in 2014 and the end of 2021.

    In a statement, he added: “Russia’s energy industry is the main source of income for Putin and companies like BP which (continued to do business with Russia despite)…the invasion of Crimea, continuing to support the money poured into its war chest, should surely wonder if they now have Ukrainian blood on their hands.”

    BP to sell its stake in Russian oil giant Rosneft

    BP announced it would give up that stake just days after Russia invaded Ukraine in February 2022. A number of other fossil fuel companies have since followed suit.

    In an email to CNN, BP spokesman David Nicholas said the company did not acknowledge the $78.4 billion figure and explained that the only amount BP paid directly to the Russian state was $350 million in taxes for the six years between 2015 and 2020. The spokesperson was unable to provide data for the full eight-year period.

    “On February 27, we announced that we would leave our stake in Rosneft, that the two directors appointed by BP would resign from its board of directors with immediate effect and that we would leave our other activities in Russia with Rosneft,” said Nicholas.

    BP now faces a potential loss of $25 billion from its exit.

    Worthy said that while BP may deny responsibility for Rosneft’s payments to the Russian state, “it has always been more than happy to benefit from the billions that have flowed from its involvement in the business.”

    While the dataset focused on payments made primarily through taxes and fees, far more money is flowing from the West to Russian state coffers in purchased oil and gas – which are used for everything from gas for home heating to fuel for cars. The true amount of money that goes from Western oil and gas companies to the Russian state would be far greater than any amount paid in taxes and royalties.

    “So when Rosneft sells its products for export, those sales transactions allow it to earn most of its money,” said Alexandra Gillies, an adviser at the Natural Resource Governance Institute (NRGI), which focuses on countries. resource-rich to achieve sustainability. .

    According to a database by NRGIRosneft transferred $58.6 billion to the Russian state in 2019 alone, the last year before the pandemic.

    Gillies said if Western companies choosing to leave Russia were a step in the right direction, it should have happened much sooner.

    “It took this invasion of Ukraine for Western oil companies to say, ‘You know what? We don’t want to allow what this regime is doing anymore.’ They should have made this call much earlier with the invasion of Crimea, or with the repressive nature of the Putin regime, or with the interference of the Putin regime in the American elections, or the poisoning of the personalities of the opposition, including on British soil,” Gillies said.

    “There have been so many moments over the past few years that should have caused Western companies to disengage from their cooperation with the regime.”

    The other four companies listed in the NGO statement are France-based TotalEnergies ($568 million); Norway-based Equinor ($455 million); OMV, based in Austria ($246 million) and Trafigura, based in Switzerland ($202 million).

    Rystad told CNN his datasets were based on estimates derived from the limited tax reports available.

    TotalEnergies also has stakes in Russian oil and gas companies that have paid hundreds of millions of dollars more to the government, according to Rystad data.

    CNN has contacted all listed companies, as well as Rosneft, for comment. ExxonMobil did not respond to CNN’s request.

    Shell did not comment to CNN on the amount of money paid and pointed out a recent press release in which the company announced that it would withdraw its participation in all Russian fossil fuel activities “in a phased manner” and stop buying Russian crude oil.
    Shell will no longer buy Russian oil and gas

    Shell CEO Ben van Beurden also apologized in the statement after the company was criticized for buying a shipment of Russian crude oil in early March when other companies and traders shunned the product after the invasion. Russian in February.

    TotalEnergies announced tuesday that it would stop buying Russian oil by the end of the year but that it would continue to buy Russian gas. The company did not respond to CNN’s request for comment.

    Equinor has ended its operations in Russia and says it has stopped trading Russian oil. His spokesperson, Ola Morten Aanestad, did not confirm the $455 million figure in an email to CNN, and said it was “too early to be specific about the process of exit,” when asked if the company would definitely stay out of Russia.

    A spokesperson for OMV did not comment on the amount of money it transferred to Russia at CNN’s request, and pointed to a recent statement in which the company said it was “reassessing its commitment in Russia”.

    Wintershall DEA told CNN the company was “unable to verify the numbers presented to us” and that it “has always conducted our business in compliance with all applicable laws.”

    A Trafigura spokesperson said the company had not paid the Russian government anything “from fossil fuel production”. The company has a 10% stake in the Vostok Oil project, of which Rosneft is the majority shareholder. The spokesperson said “no further monies have been paid” since the stake was acquired in 2020. “Trafigura has not received any dividends or similar payments from its stake in Vostok Oil.”

    Lorne Stockman, co-director of research at Oil Change International, said the world must now avoid looking to other autocratic regimes to replace the fossil fuels they shun from Russia.

    “Fossil fuels are the currency of despots, dictators and warmongers. Our global dependence on oil and gas is not only killing our planet, but also making the world less safe and less equal. Big Western polluters like BP and Shell have all of them were only too happy to work in countries that have despicable human rights records for over a century,” Stockman said.

    “The time has come to end the age of fossil fuels.”

    No winners, just losers and survivors amid payer issues

    Healthcare is not a one-size-fits-all industry. Current and projected labor markets in health care and other industries in the United States are experiencing labor shortages that are driving up wages for skilled workers.

    The healthcare industry is different from other industries. Health care does not operate in a free market where the prices of goods and services are self-regulated by buyers and sellers, based on supply and demand in a competitive market.

    Health care revenues are largely set by the government, with Medicare and Medicaid, as approximately 65% ​​of the patient-paying composition is paid by the government, and the remainder is paid by insurers using government payment like bogey. However, on the labor and supply side, health care is subject to free market forces and health care is unable to pass on the cost of labor and other increases due to the fixed payment system.

    As a result, overall healthcare operating margins, which averaged 2% nationally before the pandemic, deteriorated to negative operating margins regardless of the impact of payments. supplements to the American Rescue Plan Act.

    According to the Center for Health Care Quality and Payment Reform, 892 rural hospitals are at risk of closing, 35% of hospitals and health systems defaulted on their obligations or loans in 2021, 73 hospitals have closed since 2011 and about 1,000 hospitals have consolidated or merged in the past decade.

    The United States spends more on health care than any other developed country due to higher prices for goods and services. Health care costs in the United States consumed 18.8% of gross national product in 2021, and the median cost per capita in the United States is $9,892 compared to the median cost per capita of $4,033 for other developed countries. A growing share of healthcare provider revenue now comes directly from patients. Over 75% of patients with employer-sponsored coverage are enrolled in a health plan with an annual deductible, and over 50% of covered patients are enrolled in a high-deductible plan. The average family plan has an average annual deductible of at least $8,000.

    Several factors contribute to bad debts and charitable care, which continue to rise, resulting in a negative financial impact on health care. There is a growing number of uninsured (11% of those aged 65 and over in 2020) and underinsured people who spend more than 10% of their annual income out of pocket or whose deductible is greater than 5% of their annual income. The average annual income for a family of four is $67,521, and most health insurance plans have a family deductible of $8,000 per year. These issues have led many patients to incur bad debts and exacerbated the situation for healthcare providers by leading to significant loss of coverage. According to a Commonwealth Fund survey, 6% of US citizens insured in the first half of 2020 lost their coverage during the pandemic.

    Healthcare financial advisors have faced challenges obtaining accurate information to identify and verify patient coverage, determine likelihood of patient payment, assess eligibility to enroll eligible patients for financial assistance , collecting and assisting in developing a payment plan.

    Patients should be prioritized promptly for follow-up by billing staff as they are likely to pay their balance or who may be challenged to meet their financial responsibility and are assigned financial assistance and/or payment plans. Staff should ensure they support and communicate the payment process throughout the experience, making it less stressful and fair for all patients.

    The method of administering benefits is increasingly complex. This change in financial responsibility, coupled with the unprecedented economic conditions associated with the pandemic, has had a major impact on the loss of volume and payments from healthcare organizations.

    This situation is untenable. If the United States does not develop and support new models of health care delivery and payment that affect quality and cost, we will become even more dependent on government intervention that will lead to socialized medicine (insurance national disease). Government intervention will ration services and control providers, payers, medical intervention, technology, access and patient choice.

    As the healthcare sector heads towards a crucial inflection point over the next decade, much more needs to be done to transform and ensure that the products and services provided will continue to play a vital role in the delivery system. health care. There is a need to actualize the commitment to transform and optimize the industry to accelerate the growth and development of the delivery of high-quality, cost-effective care with a commitment to clinical excellence and personalized patient experience . The healthcare industry must consider repositioning strategic options and combinations that comprehensively integrate cutting-edge technology and clinical methods, investing in people and providing seamless access to prevention, diagnosis and treatment of all diseases in patient-friendly settings. .

    There is a need to rethink healthcare delivery models and payment systems to ensure they can meet growing and challenging market demands. Payers must also commit to designing and supporting insurance schemes that emphasize quality and cost. The healthcare industry must adapt to technological, environmental, social, governmental and patient/consumer market changes that impact their day-to-day financial and operational initiatives. Innovative strategies that need to be considered include the creation of ambulatory care as a strategic business unit within regional health systems, the establishment of a larger “system” through shared and coordinated clinical service lines, and the adoption of retail strategies.

    It’s time for ingenuity and innovation. Now is the time to try new approaches and new ways to deliver health services more cost-effectively. Healthcare leaders must seek new ways to better position themselves and proactively manage their future.

    Healthcare industry leadership must focus solely on the broad mission of improving healthcare delivery and patient outcomes by investing in growth strategies and driving continuous innovation, while controlling costs to survive.

    The healthcare industry should work together, with Congress, to consider legislation and programs that help improve the education and training of healthcare workers; improve access to vital prevention, diagnostic and treatment services for patients, such as mental health, addictions, primary care, telemedicine, home services and value-based payment programs in the fee-for-service framework; and promoting total cost of care agreements on the part of payers and other legislative proposals that impact the future survival of the health care delivery system.

    A bill would complicate initiative petitions

    0

    Lawmakers on Tuesday advanced measures that could thwart initiative petitions. (Left) Rep. Emily Virgin, D-Norman, and Rep. Forrest Bennett, D-Oklahoma City, on the floor of the Oklahoma House of Representatives Tuesday. Both opposed the measure. (Screenshot by Janice Francis-Smith)

    Lawmakers on Tuesday advanced measures that could thwart initiative petitions like those that implemented medical marijuana and the expansion of Medicaid in Oklahoma.

    Noting that these measures were passed statewide with signatures collected primarily in Oklahoma and Tulsa counties, lawmakers proposed new rules that would require the support of more voters. in rural areas.

    The Oklahoma House of Representatives has approved a series of measures that would increase the thresholds and requirements for initiative petitions. The measures must then be approved by the Senate before being submitted to a popular vote. If the measures were approved by lawmakers and put on the ballot, then a simple majority of Oklahoma voters would be able to amend the Oklahoma Constitution to raise the bar for future elections.

    Joint House Resolution 1002, by Rep. Tommy Hardin, R-Madill, would require an initiative petition to garner a certain percentage of the number of legal voters for each of Oklahoma’s 77 counties.

    Currently, signatures can come from anywhere in the state, and the number of signatures required is based on a percentage of the total number of votes cast for governor in the last general election.

    HJR would require the signatures of 8% of legal voters in each county for any legislation, 15% of voters for a constitutional amendment, and 5% for referendums.

    Enough signatures could be collected in Oklahoma and Tulsa counties alone to qualify for a statewide vote on a measure — around 100,000 for a state law or 200,000 signatures for an amendment constitutional.

    Since 1944, 500 initiative petitions have been circulated in Oklahoma, but only 44 of them have been voted on, “mainly because it’s so hard to get signatures today,” the rep said. Andy Fugate, D-Oklahoma City. Of the 44 who went to the polls, voters approved only about a quarter of them, less than a dozen measures, Fugate noted.

    “This proposal basically makes some signatures worth more than others because they’re harder to collect,” Representative House Minority Leader Emily Virgin, D-Norman, said. What’s more, it would render signatures over 8% worthless in more populated areas, Virgin said.

    Only initiatives with sufficient financial support would be able to organize a campaign to collect enough signatures from all corners of the state within the 90-day period mandated by law, Rep. Forrest Bennett said – giving a benefit to businesses or out of state. interests. Hardin countered that a well-supported grassroots effort would be able to generate enough volunteers to collect signatures.

    Basing the signature requirement on the number of registered voters rather than the number of voters who participated in the last election also increases the level of difficulty, lawmakers noted. Moreover, it would only take a few signatures that could not be verified in a rural area for the countywide signatures to be invalidated.

    House members approved HJR 1002 by a vote of 73 to 21.

    Members also approved HJR 1058, which would require 55% of the vote instead of a simple majority to approve an initiative petition measure, by a vote of 74 to 21.

    HJR 1059, which would require 55% to pass an initiative put on the ballot by lawmakers, also passed, on a 72-19 vote.

    If the 55% threshold had been in place in the past, right to work, booze and a number of other reforms would not have become law, Fugate said.

    Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment Market 2022-2030, by Top Key Players – NovaLead Pharma Pvt Ltd, Factor Therapeutics Ltd, MediWound Ltd, Leap Therapeutics Inc, Daval International Ltd

    0

    The Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment Market report is a perfect basis for people who are looking for a comprehensive study and analysis of the Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment Market. This report contains a diverse study and insights that will help you understand your niche and focus on major market channels in the regional and global Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment market. To understand the competition and take action based on your key strengths, market size, current and future years demand, supply chain information, business concerns, competitive analysis and prices as well as supplier information will be presented to you. The report also includes information about the major market players, applications of Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment, its type, trends and overall market share.

    To put your business plan into action based on our detailed report, you will also receive comprehensive and accurate forecasts and projected figures for the future. This will provide an overview of the market and help design solutions to leverage key profitable elements and gain market clarity to develop strategic plans. The data present in the report comes from different publications in our archives as well as many reputable paid databases. Moreover, the data is gathered together with the help of dealers, raw material suppliers, and customers to ensure that the end result covers every detail regarding the Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment market, making it a perfect tool for serious buyers of this study.

    Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment Market: Competition Landscape

    The Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment Market report includes insights into product launches, sustainability, and outlook from key vendors including: (NovaLead Pharma Pvt Ltd, Factor Therapeutics Ltd, MediWound Ltd, Leap Therapeutics Inc, Daval International Ltd, CytoTools AG, GangaGen Inc, Hypo-Stream Ltd, Promore Pharma, FirstString Research Inc)

    Click Link to Get Free Sample Copy of Report @ https://crediblemarkets.com/sample-request/venous-leg-ulcers-treatment-market-898062?utm_source=Amruta&utm_medium=SatPR

    Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment Market: Segmentation

    By types

    CureXcell
    CVBT-141B
    Granexin
    HP-802247
    Others

    By apps

    Hospital
    Clinical
    home use

    Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment Market: Regional Analysis

    The whole regional segmentation has been studied based on recent and future trends, and the market is forecast through the forecast period. The countries covered in the regional analysis of the Global Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment Market report are US, Canada & Mexico North America, Germany, France, UK, Russia, Italy, Spain, Turkey, Netherlands, Switzerland, Belgium and the rest of Europe in Europe, Singapore, Malaysia, Australia, Thailand, Indonesia, Philippines, China, Japan, India, Korea South, Rest of Asia-Pacific (APAC) in Asia-Pacific (APAC), Saudi Arabia, United Arab Emirates, South Africa, Egypt, Israel, Rest of Middle East and Africa (MEA) under the Middle East and Africa (MEA), and Argentina, Brazil and Rest of South America as part of South America.

    Key benefits of the report:

    • This study presents the analytical representation of the global Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment industry together with current trends and future estimations to determine impending pockets of investment.
    • The report presents information related to key drivers, restraints, and opportunities, along with a detailed analysis of the global Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment market share.
    • Current market is quantitatively analyzed from 2021 to 2028 to highlight the growth scenario of the global Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment Market.
    • Porter’s Five Forces analysis illustrates the power of buyers and suppliers in the marketplace.
    • The report provides a detailed analysis of the Global Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment Market based on the competitive intensity and how the competition will shape in the coming years.

    Directly Buy This Market Research Report Now @ https://crediblemarkets.com/reports/purchase/venous-leg-ulcers-treatment-market-898062?license_type=single_user;utm_source=Amruta&utm_medium=SatPR

    Main points covered in the table of contents:

    Market overview: It includes six sections, research scope, key manufacturers covered, market fragment by type, Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment market shares by application, study objectives and years considered.

    Market landscape:Here, the global Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment market opposition is dissected, by value, revenue, deals, and pie share by organization, market rate, fierce circumstances Most recent landscape and patterns, consolidation, development , obtaining and parts of the entire industry of large organizations.

    Manufacturer Profiles: Here, the driving players of the global Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment market are considered dependent on region of deals, key elements, net benefit, revenue, cost, and creation.

    Market Status and Outlook by Region: In this segment, the report examines net benefit, transactions, revenue, creation, global industry share, CAGR and market size by region. Here, the global Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment Market is thoroughly examined based on regions and countries like North America, Europe, China, India, Japan, and MEA.

    Application or end user: This segment of the exploration study shows how extraordinary sections of end customers/applications are adding in the global Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment market.

    Market forecast: Production side : In this part of the report, the creators focused on the creation and creation esteem conjecture, the gauge of the main manufacturers and the estimation of the creation and creation esteem by type .

    Research results and conclusion: This is one of the last segments of the report where the findings of the investigators and the end of the exploratory study are given.

    Answers to key questions in the report:

    • What will be the pace of market development of the Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment market?
    • What are the key factors driving the global Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment market?
    • Who are the main manufacturers on the market?
    • What are the market openings, market risks and market outline?
    • What are sales volume, revenue, and price analysis of top manufacturers of Venous Leg Ulcer Treatment market?
    • Who are the distributors, traders and dealers of Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment Market?
    • What are the Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment market opportunities and threats faced by the vendors in the global Venous Leg Ulcers Treatment industries?
    • What are the deals, revenue, and value review by market types and uses?
    • What are the transactions, revenue and value review by business areas?

    About Us

    Credible Markets is a new era market research company with a firm grip on the pulse of global markets. Credible Markets has become a trusted source for business market research needs in a short period of time. We’ve partnered with leading market intelligence publishers and our report pool coverage spans all key industry verticals and thousands of micro-markets. The massive repository allows our clients to choose from recently released reports from a range of publishers who also provide in-depth analysis by region and country. Moreover, pre-booked research reports are among our best offers.

    The collection of market intelligence reports is regularly updated to provide visitors with quick access to the latest market information. We provide round-the-clock support to help you reuse search parameters and benefit from a full range of reserved reports. After all, it’s about helping you make an informed strategic decision on purchasing the right report that meets all your market research demands.

    Contact us

    Credible market analyzes
    99 Wall Street 2124 New York, NY 10005
    E-mail: [email protected]

    Most unvaccinated children lack antibodies after COVID; GSK vaccine shows promise against Omicron

    0

    March 21 (Reuters) – The following is a summary of some recent studies on COVID-19. They include research that deserves further study to corroborate the findings and that has not yet been certified by peer review.

    Most unvaccinated children lack antibodies after COVID-19

    Most children and adolescents do not have COVID-19 antibodies in their blood after recovering from SARS-CoV-2 infection, new data has confirmed.

    Join now for FREE unlimited access to Reuters.com

    Register

    Beginning in October 2020, researchers in Texas recruited 218 subjects ages 5 to 19 who had recovered from COVID infections at some point in the past. Each provided three blood samples, three months apart. More than 90% were unvaccinated when they enrolled in the study. The first blood test showed antibodies linked to the infection in only a third of the children, the researchers reported online Friday in Pediatrics. Six months later, only half of those who had the antibodies still had them. The study was designed to detect the presence of antibodies, which are only one part of the immune system’s defences, not the amount of antibodies. The level of protection, even in those with antibodies, is unclear. Researchers found no difference depending on whether a child was asymptomatic, the severity of symptoms, when they had the virus, or due to weight or gender.

    “It was the same for everyone,” Sarah Messiah of UTHealth School of Public Health Dallas said in a statement. “Some parents…think that just because their child has had COVID-19, they are now protected and don’t need to be vaccinated,” Messiah said. “We have a great tool available to give children extra protection by getting vaccinated.”

    GSK’s experimental vaccine shows promise against Omicron

    A booster shot of an experimental vaccine developed by GSK (GSK.L) showed “durable protection” against the Omicron variant in rhesus macaques, according to new data.

    The monkeys had received two initial doses of the vaccine plus a booster 6 or 12 months later. Blood samples from the boosted primates showed “remarkably high” levels of antibodies that could neutralize both the original strain of the virus and the Omicron variant that skyrocketed infections, the researchers reported. Sunday on bioRxiv before peer review. The animals’ second-line immune defenses were also “substantial and persistent”, they said. The vaccine, called GBP510 and developed in partnership with SK Bioscience (302440.KS), triggers immune system responses by delivering copies of a key part of the coronavirus’ surface spike protein. The protein “subunits” are studded on nanoparticles to resemble the virus itself. These components are supplemented with an adjuvant that boosts immune system responses, explained Bali Pulendran of Stanford University in California.

    “Vaccination with two doses … followed a year later by a booster shot … plus an adjuvant, led to very durable antibody responses and protection against Omicron infection even six months later,” said said Pulendran. Large late-stage trials of GBP510 in humans are underway.

    AstraZeneca drug less protective against Omicron in transplant patients

    AstraZeneca (AZN.L) antibody injections given to prevent COVID-19 in children and high-risk adults with weakened immune systems do not adequately protect organ recipients against the Omicron variant, researchers have found. researchers.

    The drug, Evusheld, protected against the Delta variant in kidney transplant recipients, and lab test results released Monday show that Evusheld can neutralize Omicron in mice, including the highly contagious BA.2 version. But of the 416 kidney recipients treated with Evusheld after Omicron became the predominant variant, 9.4% developed symptomatic breakthrough infections, and one in three patients required hospitalization, the researchers reported. Saturday on medRxiv before peer review. Two patients have died from COVID-19. In laboratory experiments, researchers exposed the BA.1 version of Omicron which caused the winter spike in blood samples from 15 patients treated with Evusheld. None of the samples was able to neutralize the virus.

    The United States Food and Drug Administration recently advised that higher doses of Evusheld are likely needed to prevent Omicron infections, and that patients who received the originally approved injections should receive booster doses. The researchers said kidney transplant recipients “should be advised to maintain health protection measures and undergo vaccine boosters.”

    Click for a Reuters Chart on vaccines in development.

    Join now for FREE unlimited access to Reuters.com

    Register

    Reporting by Nancy Lapid; Editing by Bill Berkrot

    Our standards: The Thomson Reuters Trust Principles.